JP2020168580A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 comprises a game board in which a game area is formed. The game area comprises plural electric role winning ports and plural through gates corresponding to the respective electric role winning ports. Based on passage of a game ball to the respective through gate, a support lottery whether or not a support of respective electric accessory disposed on the respective electric role winning port, is independently performed. In addition, based on performing of the support lottery, a variation display of a normal pattern on each unit area of an accessory display part, is started. At this time, when a winning variation display of the normal pattern is finished on a second unit area or third unit area, measurement of a variation display time of the normal pattern on other unit area, is temporarily stopped.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering portion provided in the gaming area. In addition, when the game ball enters the starting ball entry section, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to shift to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, and a pattern is displayed on the display device provided in the game area. Fluctuation display of is started. Then, when the lottery is won, for example, the combination of the specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. In the specific gaming state, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, and the game ball is paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-35977

Here, in the gaming machines such as the pachinko machines illustrated above, those capable of improving the interest are required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest.

The present invention
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the preset grant information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. In some cases, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the plurality of special information, and
Based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined grant support state. Migration method and
The game rotation operation is started based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is set and the game rotation operation is terminated. A game time control means that controls a predetermined notification means so that the game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. A perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. A perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. (A) A front view showing the configuration of a game board, and (b) an explanatory view of a display unit for an accessory. (A) A front view showing the first electric accessory and its surroundings, and (b) a front view showing the second electric accessory and its surroundings. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for explaining a decorative pattern. Explanatory drawing for explaining display contents on the display screen of a symbol display device. Explanatory drawing for explaining the contents of various counters. Explanatory drawing for explaining various variable display time tables. A flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing a winning process for thru. A flowchart showing a confirmation process for a hold notice. A flowchart showing normal processing. The flowchart which shows the 1st electric service correspondence processing. 1st Flow chart A flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. The flowchart which shows the 1st electric service opening / closing process. A flowchart showing a process corresponding to off display. The flowchart which shows the 2nd electric service correspondence processing. A flowchart showing the second normal figure fluctuation start processing. The flowchart which shows the 2nd electric service opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows the 3rd electric service correspondence processing. A timing chart to explain the flow of the game. A block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing various effects. A flowchart showing the effect control process. Flowchart showing pending command correspondence processing. Flowchart showing open command correspondence processing. A flowchart showing processing corresponding to variable commands. A timing chart to explain the relationship between the flow of the game and various productions. Explanatory drawing for explaining the display mode displayed on the display screen in various effects. (A) A front view of the game board in the second embodiment, (b) a schematic cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device, and (c) a schematic cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device. Explanatory drawing for explaining the contents of various counters. (A) A flowchart showing a first special figure fluctuation start process, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a first table. (A) A flowchart showing a second special figure fluctuation start process, (b-1) an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal table, and (b-2) an explanatory diagram for explaining a time saving table. A flowchart showing the processing corresponding to the open / close execution command. The front view of the game board in the 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for explaining the contents of various counters. A flowchart showing the processing for electric service support.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates and the like on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment.

The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It is supposed to be movable.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 by using the unlocking key.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 21 so that almost the entire area of the game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 22 is fitted therein. The window panel 22 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the window panel 22 may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 21. An indicator lamp unit 23 is provided above the window unit 21 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the indicator lamp unit 23, speaker units 24 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 25a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 25, and a lower plate 26a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 26. The upper plate 25a is for guiding the game balls discharged from the payout device, which will be described later, to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side (see FIG. 2) having a function of launching the game balls while temporarily storing them and arranging them in a row. Has a function. Further, the lower plate 26a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 25a. The game balls paid out from the payout device of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 25a and the lower plate 26a through the passage forming unit 28 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

A firing handle 29 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a in the front door frame 14. By operating the launch handle 29, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 provided below the game area in the inner frame toward the game area. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 29, the launch intensity of the game ball launched toward the game area, that is, the launch momentum is changed.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 31 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 32 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 31. A game board 33 having a game area formed on the front surface side is detachably attached to the resin base 31. The game board 33 is made of plywood, and the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 32 of the resin base 31.

The configuration of the game board 33 will be described with reference to FIG. 4A. FIG. 4A is a front view of the game board 33.

An inner rail portion 34 and an outer rail portion 35 are attached to the surface of the game board 33, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 34 and the outer rail portion 35. Further, the inner rail portion 34 and the outer rail portion 35 form a guide rail 36 for the game ball to the game area, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 by the player rotating the launch handle 29. Is guided to the upper part of the game area by the guide rail 36.

The guide rail 36 is formed so that its exit portion faces the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 29 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 36 is formed to the side opposite to it. It shifts to the side of the department. The outlet portion of the guide rail 36 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

The game board 33 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In each opening, there are a general winning opening 40, a first electric service winning opening 41, a second electric service winning opening 42, a third electric service winning opening 43, a first through gate 51, a second through gate 52, and a third through gate. 53, a variable display unit 61, a display unit 62 for accessories, and the like are provided.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 40 and each electric service winning opening 41 to 43, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 33, and based on the detection result. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 40 and each electric service winning opening 41 to 43, 10 game balls are paid out.

The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. The number of payouts may be different between the second electric service winning opening 42 and the third electric service winning opening 43. Further, the number of payouts of the first electric service winning opening 41 may be smaller than the number of payouts of the second electric service winning opening 42 and the third electric service winning opening 43.

In addition, an out opening 63 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 33, and game balls that do not enter various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area through the out opening 63. Further, on the game board 33, a large number of nails 64 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Aspects that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 63, the game ball to the general winning opening 40, each electric service winning opening 41 to 43, and each through gate 51 to 53 Entering a ball is also expressed as winning.

A part of each of the through gates 51 to 53 is fixed so as to project forward with respect to the board surface of the game board 33. The protruding portion is provided with a ball passing portion through which the game ball can pass from the upper side (upstream side) to the lower side (downstream side). The ball passing portion penetrates in the vertical direction and is formed larger than the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing from above the game area passes through the ball passing portion and flows as it is to the downstream side of the game area.

Further, each of the through gates 51 to 53 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passing portion. The detection sensor is connected to the main control device described later, and the detection result of the detection sensor is output to the main control device.

The positional relationship of the through gates 51 to 53 is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 can pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. Specifically, the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The first through gate 51 is at a position where the through gates that the game balls that have passed through the first through gate 51 sway in the lateral direction are different, specifically, the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53. It is located above the center line of both. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 flows through the area surrounded by the through gates 51 to 53, and depends on the flow mode of the game ball in the area (lateral fluctuation of the game ball). It is possible to pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53.

Further, between the first through gate 51, the second through gate 52, and the third through gate 53, the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. As described above, a plurality of guide nails 64a for guiding the game ball are provided. Each guide nail 64a is arranged below the first through gate 51. The guide nails 64a are arranged side by side at intervals smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The distance between the guide nail 64a and the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 is such that the game ball cannot pass between the guide nail 64a and the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. , It is set shorter than the diameter of the game ball.

According to this configuration, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 flows downward as it is, it collides with the guide nail 64a and is repelled to either the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. You will be guided. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 can easily pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53.

In this case, whether the game ball that collides with the guide nail 64a passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 differs depending on the collision mode between the game ball and the guide nail 64a. Therefore, whether the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is random.

The relative positional relationship between the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 in the vertical direction is set to be the same, but the relative positional relationship is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be shifted in the vertical direction. However, from the viewpoint of randomness, it is better to set the relative positional relationship in the vertical direction to be the same.

Here, the frequency at which the game ball passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 via the first through gate 51 is configured to be higher than the frequency when the game ball does not pass through the first through gate 51. ing. Specifically, the regulation nail 64b that regulates the flow mode of the game ball so that the game ball that passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51 is less likely to occur. Is provided. The regulation nail 64b is provided on a path other than the path via the first through gate 51 among the flow paths of the game balls toward the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53. The distance between the regulating nails 64b is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to such a configuration, the game ball flowing through the flow path through the first through gate 51 flows down in the space formed by the through gates 51 to 53 and the nails 64a and 64b, and flows down in the space formed by the second through gate 52 or the second through gate 52 or the first through gate 51. 3 Easy to pass through the through gate 53. On the other hand, the game ball flowing through the flow path not passing through the first through gate 51 is easily passed through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 by being repelled by each regulation nail 64b.

The distance between the lowermost regulating nail 64b and the guide nail 64a is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, an event may occur in which the game ball passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of the above distances may be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball so that the above event does not occur.

When the winning of each through gate 51 to 53 is detected, an internal lottery is performed. The lottery result of the internal lottery is displayed on the accessory display unit 62. The accessory display unit 62 is provided on the decorative member 65 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 65 extends forward from the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 33. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 65 faces the window panel 22 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further, with the window panel 22. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 65.

The accessory display portion 62 is provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 65. That is, the accessory display unit 62 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball falls in front of the accessory display unit 62. It is prevented. In addition, on the upper surface of the decorative member 65, a part of the above-mentioned general winning openings 40 is installed in a state of being opened upward.

The accessory display unit 62 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (b). FIG. 4B is a front view of the accessory display unit 62.

The accessory display unit 62 is formed with a display area 70 in which the lottery result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 51 to 53 is clearly shown. The display area 70 is vertically arranged and divided into three unit areas 71 to 73, and each unit area 71 to 73 and each through gate 51 to 53 have a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the first unit area 71 is associated with the first through gate 51, the second unit area 72 is associated with the second through gate 52, and the third unit area 73 is associated with the third through. It is associated with the gate 53.

In each of the unit areas 71 to 73, ordinary symbols of "○" and "x" are formed so as to be displayable. When a prize is generated in a predetermined through gate (for example, the first through gate 51), "○" and "x" are used in the unit area (for example, the first unit area 71) corresponding to the predetermined through gate with the prize as a trigger. The variable display (change display) of the normal symbol is started, and the variable display of the normal symbol is performed over a predetermined time (period). Then, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is the winning result, the normal symbol of "○" is displayed as the stop result corresponding to the winning result in the corresponding unit area, and the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a deviation result, a normal symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop result corresponding to the deviation result, and the variable display ends.

Needless to say, the ordinary symbol is arbitrary in terms of its specific shape as long as it can be specified that it is a winning result or a losing result. In addition, the variable display mode of the ordinary symbol is also arbitrary.

Further, in the following description, when the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is the winning result, the variation display of the normal symbol performed in the first unit area 71 is simply the first unit area 71. The variation display of the normal symbol performed in the first unit area 71 when the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is the result of the deviation is simply referred to as the winning variation display of the first unit area 71. It is also called an out-of-order fluctuation display. The same applies to the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73.

Further, the variation display of the first unit area 71 is started, the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the internal lottery is stopped (confirmed), and the period until the variation display is stopped corresponds to one game.

If the normal symbol of "○" is stopped and displayed based on the lottery result of the above internal lottery, it goes to the electric service winning opening corresponding to the predetermined through gate among the electric service winning openings 41 to 43. The expectation of winning a prize is getting higher.

The detailed configuration of each electric service winning opening 41 to 43 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a front view showing the first electric service winning opening 41 and its surroundings, and FIG. 5B is a front view showing the second electric service winning opening 42 and its surroundings. Since the 2nd electric service winning opening 42 and the 3rd electric service winning opening 43 are the same including the peripheral configuration, the 2nd electric service winning opening 42 will be described, and the 3rd electric service winning opening 43 will be described. Omits a detailed description.

Electric accessories 41a to 43a are provided in each of the electric service winning openings 41 to 43, respectively. Each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a has a pair of left and right movable pieces, and can be switched between a closed state (closed state, unsupported state or non-guided state) and an open state (open state, supported state or guided state). It is configured in. In the closed state, since the distance between the left and right movable pieces is small, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in each electric service winning opening 41 to 43. On the other hand, in the open state, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 5, since the distance between the left and right movable pieces is large, it is easy for the game ball to win each electric service winning opening 41 to 43. In other words, it can be said that in the open state, the flow path of the game ball to each of the electric service winning openings 41 to 43 is larger than in the closed state.

In the following description, the open state of the electric accessories 41a to 43a is also referred to as simply opening, and the closed state of the electric accessories 41a to 43a is also referred to as simply closing.

The electric accessories 41a to 43a are associated with each through gate 51 to 53 (and each unit area 71 to 73) on a one-to-one basis. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a provided in the first electric service winning opening 41 is associated with the first through gate 51 (first unit area 71), and is associated with the second electric service winning opening 42. The provided second electric accessory 42a is associated with the second through gate 52 (second unit area 72), and the third electric accessory 43a provided in the third electric service winning opening 43 is the third through. It is associated with the gate 53 (third unit area 73). If the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the predetermined through gate is the winning result, after the winning variation display of the unit area corresponding to the predetermined through gate is completed, the electric combination corresponding to the predetermined through gate The opening and closing operation of the object is performed in a predetermined operation mode. As a result, the expectation of winning a prize in the electric service winning opening provided with the electric accessory in which the opening / closing operation is performed is increased. The opening / closing operation of each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a is also simply referred to as support. In this case, it can be said that the state in which the opening and closing operations of the electric accessories 41a to 43a are performed is the support state of the electric accessories 41a to 43a.

Here, the first electric service winning opening 41 provided with the first electric accessory 41a is configured so that the game ball does not win the prize regardless of the opening / closing mode of the first electric accessory 41a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, a first specific regulation nail 64c is provided above the first electric service winning opening 41 to prevent the first electric service winning opening 41 from winning a prize. Has been done. A plurality of the first specific regulation nails 64c are arranged side by side so as to surround the first electric service winning opening 41 from the original side in the flow direction of the game ball, and the distance between each of the first specific regulation nails 64c is from the diameter of the game ball. Is also set small. As a result, the game ball cannot win the first electric service winning opening 41.

On the other hand, if the second electric accessory 42a is closed above the second electric service winning opening 42 (and the third electric service winning opening 43), it is not possible to win a prize in the second electric service winning opening 42. When the second electric accessory 42a is in the open state, a plurality of second specific regulation nails 64d are provided to allow the second electric accessory winning opening 42 to win a prize. Each of the second specific regulation nails 64d is arranged side by side on the flow path to the second electric service winning opening 42 in the situation where the second electric accessory 42a is in the closed state. The distance between the second specified regulation nails 64d is set shorter than the diameter of the game ball. The distance between the second specified regulation nail 64d and the tip of the second electric accessory 42a in the closed state is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball, while the distance between the second specified regulation nail 64d and the tip is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The distance from the tip of the second electric accessory 42a in the situation is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the second electric accessory 42a is in the closed state, it becomes extremely difficult to win a prize in the second electric accessory winning opening 42, and only when the second electric accessory 42a is in the open state, the second electric accessory It becomes easy to win a prize in the winning opening 42.

The configuration that prohibits the winning of the first electric service winning opening 41 is not limited to the first specified regulation nail 64c, and is optional as long as the winning of the first electric service winning opening 41 is prohibited. is there. For example, instead of the first specific regulation nail 64c, an accessory may be provided. Further, based on the fact that a movable accessory is provided at a position where the game ball cannot enter the first electric accessory winning opening 41 and a position where the game ball is allowed to enter, and support for the first electric accessory 41a is started. The accessory may be moved from the allowable position to the unacceptable position.

Further, regardless of the opening / closing mode of the first electric accessory 41a, it is not possible for the game ball to win the first electric accessory winning opening 41, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first electric accessory 41a When it is in the open state, a prize may be allowed in the first electric service winning opening 41. In this case, the second electric accessory 42a (or the third electric accessory 43a) is open with the expectation that the game ball will win the first electric accessory winning opening 41 in the situation where the first electric accessory 41a is open. It is preferable to adjust the positions of the specific regulation nails 64c and 64d so that the game ball becomes smaller than the expected degree of winning the second electric service winning opening 42 (or the third electric service winning opening 43) in the state of the state. .. In addition, there is no payout of the game ball based on the prize in the first electric service winning opening 41, or the number of payouts is the payout of the game ball based on the winning in the second electric service winning opening 42 and the third electric service winning opening 43. It may be set less than the number of.

Further, even if the electric accessory 41a to 43a are in the closed state, the electric accessory winning openings 41 to 43 may be winning a prize. In short, it suffices that the electric accessory 41a to 43a are configured to increase the expectation of winning the electric accessory winning openings 41 to 43 by shifting from the closed state to the open state.

Next, the positional relationship between the electric service winning openings 41 to 43 will be described. The first electric service winning opening 41 is provided on the right side in the game area, and specifically, is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 61. There is. Further, the second electric service winning opening 42 and the third electric service winning opening 43 are provided above the variable display unit 61.

The second electric service winning opening 42 and the case where the second electric service winning opening 42 is generated and the case where the third electric service winning opening 43 is generated, so that it is necessary to separate the game balls. The position of the third electric service winning opening 43 is set. Specifically, the second electric service winning opening 42 and the third electric service winning opening 43 are arranged laterally at predetermined intervals in the game area. As a result, the flow path of the game ball in which a prize is likely to occur in the second electric service winning opening 42 and the flow path of the game ball in which a prize is likely to occur in the third electric service winning opening 43 are different. Therefore, when the second electric accessory 42a is opened and closed, the player causes the game ball to flow down the left area of the game area in order to increase the frequency of winning the second electric accessory winning opening 42. When the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 29 is changed and the third electric accessory 43a is opened and closed, the game is played in the right area of the game area in order to increase the frequency of winning the third electric accessory winning opening 43. It is assumed that the amount of rotation of the firing handle 29 is changed so that the ball flows down.

Further, in order to favorably perform the above-mentioned separation, a game ball that flows down to the left side of the game area on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the second electric service winning opening 42 and the third electric service winning opening 43. Is provided with a striking guide nail 64e so that the game ball flows down toward the second electric service winning opening 42 and the game ball flowing down the area to the right of the game area flows down toward the third electric service winning port 43.

It should be noted that the positional relationship between the second electric service winning opening 42 and the third electric service winning opening 43 may be set so as to require a distinction, for example, the first electric service winning opening 41 is arranged. The third electric service winning opening 43 may be arranged at the position.

The variable display unit 61 is provided with a symbol display device 81 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of decorative symbols (decorative symbols). Further, in the variable display unit 61, a center frame 82 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 81. The upper portion of the center frame 82 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 81, and there is no inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. ing.

The symbol display device 81 is for notifying the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51. The symbol display device 81 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 81, for example, decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these decorative symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 81 is triggered by winning a prize in the first through gate 51.

The center frame 82 is provided with holding lamp portions 91 to 93 corresponding to the through gates 51 to 53. Specifically, a first holding lamp portion 91 corresponding to the first through gate 51 is provided below the center frame 82. The number of game balls that have won the first through gate 51 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the first holding lamp unit 91.

A second holding lamp portion 92 corresponding to the second through gate 52 is provided on the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 82. The number of game balls that have won the second through gate 52 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second holding lamp unit 92.

A third holding lamp portion 93 corresponding to the third through gate 53 is provided in the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 82. The number of game balls that have won the third through gate 53 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the third holding lamp unit 93.

In addition, each holding lamp unit 91-93 may be configured to be displayed by a part of the symbol display device 81.

A stage 94 on which the game ball can stay is provided in the lower part of the center frame 82. The stage 94 has a width wider than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction, and has a smooth streamline shape symmetrical with respect to the center. Specifically, the central portion in the lateral direction of the stage 94 is raised upward, and the left and right portions thereof are recessed downward. Then, an inclined surface inclined downward toward the rear is formed in the central portion. Behind this inclined surface, a guide passage 95 having a game ball exit is provided above the first through gate 51. As a result, the game ball that has reached the central portion of the stage 94 is guided to the guide passage 95 by the inclined surface, and is further easily guided to the upper side of the first through gate 51 by the guide passage 95. Then, the guided game ball passes through the first through gate 51 with a relatively high probability. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage 94.

Although not shown, the center frame 82 is formed with a game ball passage that guides the game ball to the stage 94. The game ball passage is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. The game ball passage is formed with an opening provided at an outer portion of the center frame 82 as an entrance portion and an opening provided at an end portion of the stage 94 as an exit portion. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entrance portion is led out to the stage 94 via the game ball passage.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 101 and a voice emission control device 102 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 33).

The main control device 101 includes a main control board that controls the main control of the game and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the power supply, and the main control board and the power failure monitoring board are formed in a board box 103 made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and constructed. The substrate box 103 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box coupling portion 104 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), whereby the substrate box 103 is sealed. Since they are inseparably connected by the box coupling portions 104, the substrate box 103 needs to be destroyed or partially cut when the internal space of the substrate box 103 is opened. A plurality of box coupling portions 104 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 103, and at least one of them is used to perform the bonding process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 104 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box connecting portion 104, the box base and the box cover can be connected. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the box cover. The joining process by the box joining portion 104 prevents illegal opening after the joining, and even if illegal opening is performed, such a situation can be detected early and easily, and once. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions 104. Then, when the board box 103 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box joint 104 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box joint 104 Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 103 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion 104. If the history of the opening of the board box 103 is left in the board box 103, it is easy to discover that the board box 103 has been opened illegally by looking at the board box 103.

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box 103, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing sticker is peeled off from the sticking portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing sticker remains on the substrate box 103 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

The voice emission control device 102 includes a voice lamp control board that controls voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 101, and the voice lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed in a substrate box 105.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 111, and a payout mechanism unit 112 and a control device collecting unit 113 are attached to the back pack 111. The back pack 111 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 114 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 101, the voice emission control device 102, and the like from the rear. are doing.

The payout mechanism unit 112 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 114, and is a tank 115 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 115. It is provided with a payout device 116 for paying out balls. The game ball paid out from the payout device 116 is discharged to the upper plate 25a or the lower plate 26a through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 116. Further, the payout mechanism unit 112 is mounted with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power supply of 24 volts AC.

The control device collective unit 113 includes a payout control device 117, a power supply, and a launch control device 118. The payout control device 117 and the power supply and launch control device 118 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 117 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 117 includes a payout control board that controls the payout device 116 and is housed in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 103 of the main control device 101 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 117.

The power supply and launch control device 118 is configured by accommodating a power supply and a launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and is further produced by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the launch handle 29. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 101. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 202, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. It is an element having a built-in RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204 are provided as another element.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 117, various detection sensors 211a to 211g, etc. provided in the main control device 101 are connected to the input side of the MPU 202. In this case, the power supply and the launch control device 118 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Further, as a part of various detection sensors 211a to 211g, a plurality of detection sensors provided in the winning ball portion corresponding to winning such as the general winning opening 40, each electric service winning opening 41 to 43, each through gate 51 to 53, etc. are connected. In the MPU 202 of the main control device 101, a winning determination (ball entry determination) is performed for each ball entry unit. Further, in MPU 202, a support lottery is executed based on the winning of each through gate 51 to 53.

A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 117, and a voice emission control device 102 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 117, for example, based on the winning determination results of the general winning opening 40 and the electric service winning openings 41 to 43. In this case, the command information storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when a prize is specified for the general prize opening 40 or each of the electric service winning openings 41 to 43, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output.

The MPU 202 outputs various commands such as a hold command, an open command, and a variable command to the voice emission control device 102. In this case, the command information storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. It should be noted that each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, there is a first electric accessory drive unit 41b that opens and closes the first electric accessory 41a of the first electric combination winning port 41, and a second electric accessory 42a of the second electric role winning opening 42. The second electric accessory drive unit 42b for opening and closing, the third electric accessory drive unit 43b for opening and closing the third electric accessory 43a of the third electric accessory winning opening 43, and the accessory display unit 62 are connected to each other. There is. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units and display control of the accessory display unit 62 through the driver circuits.

That is, when a prize for a predetermined through gate among the through gates 51 to 53 is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the predetermined through gate, the corresponding through gate on the accessory display unit 62 corresponds to the predetermined through gate. The variable display of the normal symbol is performed in the unit area to be used. Then, when the lottery result of the support lottery based on the above winning is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit corresponding to the predetermined through gate is executed after the end of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Here, since the electric accessory drive units 41b to 43b are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the electric accessory 41a to 43a, it is possible to individually drive and control the electric accessory 41a to 43a. It is possible.

The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and launch control device 118, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 118. The payout control device 117 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 101.

The power supply and launch control device 118 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 201, the payout control device 117, etc. is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 118 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

Based on various commands input from the main control device 101, the voice emission control device 102 includes display lamp units 23 and speakers provided on the holding lamp units 91 to 93 provided on the variable display unit 61 and the front door frame 14. The unit 24 is driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled.

The display control device 212 executes the display control of the symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the voice emission control device 102. In this case, the voice emission control device 102 determines the variation display time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 81 and the type of combination of the decorative symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 101. To do.

Here, the contents related to the variable display of the decorative design will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, as shown in FIGS. 7 (a) to 7 (i), data of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and as shown in FIG. 7 (j). The data of the sub-designs without numbers are stored in advance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 81. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen G, triggered by the winning of the first through gate 51 or the start of support of the first electric accessory 41a, the variation display of the first unit area 71 or the support of the first electric accessory 41a is performed. Therefore, the decorative symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 decorative symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 decorative symbols.

Further, the combination of decorative symbols according to the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is stopped and displayed, so that the lottery result can be grasped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8B, on the display screen G, three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine 3 × 3 symbols are displayed. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a combination of decorative symbols (a combination of jackpot decorative symbols) in which the same number is attached to one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, a moving image showing that the player is in an advantageous state is displayed.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). (2 pattern rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

The mode of variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol rows, and decoration of each symbol row. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to perform a support lottery for whether or not to open / close each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a, set the display of the accessory display unit 62, and the like. As shown in FIG. 9, the first electric service counter C1 used for the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a, the second electric service counter C2 used for the support lottery of the second electric accessory 42a, and the second 3 The third electric service counter C3 used for the support lottery of the electric accessory 43a is used. Further, the variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time, which is the time during which the variation display is performed, is used in the accessory display unit 62.

Each of the electric service counters C1 to C3 and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 230 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. The RAM 204 is provided with electric service holding areas 231 to 233 corresponding to the electric service counters C1 to C3, and the electric service counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding electric service holding areas. .. Specifically, the first electric service holding area 231 in which the first electric service counter C1 is stored based on the winning of the first through gate 51 and the second electric service counter C2 based on the winning of the second through gate 52. A second electric service holding area 232 in which the third electric service holding area 232 is stored, and a third electric service holding area 233 in which the third electric service counter C3 is stored based on the winning of the third through gate 53 are provided.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first electric service counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 240, and after reaching the maximum value (240), it returns to 0. The first electric service counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first electric service holding area 231 at the timing when the game ball wins the first through gate 51.

The value of the first electric service counter C1 that results in the lottery result of the support lottery is stored in the ROM 203 in advance. Specifically, when the value of the first electric service counter C1 is "7", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is out of order. On the other hand, if the value of the first electric service counter C1 is other than "7", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a is 240/241.

The value of the first electric service counter C1 that results in the disconnection is arbitrary. Further, the number of the first electric service counters C1 that result in the disconnection is not limited to one, and may be a plurality.

The second electric service counter C2 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (250), it returns to 0. The second electric service counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the second electric service holding area 232 at the timing when the game ball wins the second through gate 52.

The value of the second electric service counter C2, which results in the support lottery being missed, is stored in advance in the ROM 203. Specifically, when the value of the second electric service counter C2 is "100", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is out of order. On the other hand, if the value of the second electric service counter C2 is other than "100", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery for the second electric accessory 42a is 250/251.

The value of the second electric service counter C2, which is the result of disconnection, is arbitrary. Further, the number of the second electric service counters C2 that result in the disconnection is not limited to one, and may be a plurality.

The third electric service counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 232, and after reaching the maximum value (232), it returns to 0. The third electric service counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the third electric service holding area 233 at the timing when the game ball wins the third through gate 53.

The value of the third electric service counter C3, which results in the support lottery being missed, is stored in advance in the ROM 203. Specifically, when the value of the third electric service counter C3 is "200", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is out of order. On the other hand, if the value of the third electric service counter C3 is other than "200", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery of the third electric accessory 43a is 232/233.

The value of the third electric service counter C3, which is the result of disconnection, is arbitrary. Further, the number of the third electric service counter C3 that results in the disconnection is not limited to one, and may be a plurality.

Further, the winning probabilities of the support lottery are almost the same for the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a, but the probability is not limited to this, and they may be set to be exactly the same, and the difference may be increased. May be good.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time of the normal symbol in each unit area 71 to 73 of the accessory display unit 62. In the following description, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in each unit area 71 to 73 is also simply referred to as the fluctuation display time of each unit area 71 to 73.

Here, the variation display time of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 when the lottery result of the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a is the winning result (hereinafter, also referred to as the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71). Is set to a predetermined fixed time, specifically 0.5 sec. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a is the deviation result, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 (hereinafter, also the deviation fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71). Is configured to fluctuate according to the variation type counter CS. Further, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is also configured to fluctuate according to the fluctuation type counter CS.

Specifically, when the deviation display is started in the first unit area 71, or when the fluctuation display is started in the other unit areas 72 and 73, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Will be done. Then, by referring to the variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 222 provided in the ROM 203, the variation display time corresponding to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS is selected.

The variable display time table will be described with reference to FIG. 10A and 10B are explanatory views for explaining various variable display time tables, FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first table TD1, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory view for explaining the second table TD2. 10 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third table TD3.

A plurality of variable display time tables are stored in the variable display time table storage area 222 corresponding to each unit area 71 to 73. Specifically, in the situation where the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is the result of the deviation, the first table TD1 referred to when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed in the first unit area 71. The second table TD2, which is referred to when the normal symbol is variablely displayed in the second unit area 72, and the third table TD3, which is referred to when the normal symbol is variablely displayed in the third unit area 73. And are remembered.

The first table TD1 is referred to only when the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is a wrong result, and as shown in FIG. 10A, the variable type counter CS It is a table in which the numerical range of is associated with the deviation variation display time of the first unit area 71. As a result, the deviation variation display time of the first unit area 71 varies according to the value of the variation type counter CS.

As shown in FIGS. 10 (b) and 10 (c), the second table TD2 and the third table TD3 are tables in which the numerical range of the variation type counter CS and the variation display time are associated with each other. In the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, the numerical range of the variation type counter CS and the type of the variation display time are set to be the same. On the other hand, the correspondence between the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation display time is different.

Specifically, 0.7 sec is associated with the variation type counter CS “0 to 79” in the second table TD2, while 1.3 sec is associated with the third table TD3. Further, 1.0 sec is associated with the variation type counter CS “80 to 159” in the second table TD2, while 0.7 sec is associated with the third table TD3. Further, 1.3 sec is associated with the variation type counter CS “160 to 198” in the second table TD2, while 1.0 sec is associated with the third table TD3.

According to such a configuration, in the situation where the fluctuation display of the normal symbol of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is performed, the normal in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 using the same fluctuation type counter CS. When determining the variable display time of the symbol, different variable display times are selected. This action will be described later.

Here, the relationship between the variable display time of the first unit area 71 and the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 will be described. The winning variation display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit region 71 is set shorter than the shortest variation display time (0.7 sec) of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. As a result, the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is likely to end before the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73.

On the other hand, the shortest deviation display time (30 sec) of the first unit region 71 is set longer than the longest fluctuation display time (1.3 sec) of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. As a result, the fluctuation display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is likely to end before the deviation display of the first unit region 71 ends.

The variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be different depending on the lottery result of the support lottery. Specifically, the winning variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be set shorter than the deviation variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. As a result, the support interval between the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a can be shortened, and the benefits given to the player can be increased.

On the other hand, the winning variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be set longer than the deviation variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. As a result, the support interval between the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a can be lengthened, and the privilege given to the player can be reduced.

Further, in the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, the numerical range related to the distribution of the variation type counter CS is set to be the same (0.7 sec to 1.3 sec), but the present invention is not limited to this, and both of them are not limited to this. The numerical range may be different.

Further, the variation display time of the distribution destination is common to both the second table TD2 and the third table TD3 (0.7 sec, 1.0 sec, 1.3 sec), but different types of variation display times are distributed. The configuration may be set as the destination. In the third table TD3, 0.8 sec, 0.9 sec, and 1.2 sec may be set as the fluctuation display time of the distribution destination.

Returning to the description of FIG. 9, each electric service holding area 231 to 233 will be described.

First, the first electric service holding area 231 will be described. The first electric service holding area 231 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used for a lottery counter according to the winning history of the first through gate 51. The numerical information of the first electric service counter C1 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4. In this case, in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4, when the first through gate 51 is won a plurality of times in succession, the first reserved area RE1 → the second reserved area RE2 → the third Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the holding area RE3 to the fourth holding area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first through gate 51 can be held and stored.

Further, the holding area RE includes a first holding number storage area N1, and the number of holding history of winning the winning history to the first through gate 51 is specified in the first holding number storage area N1. Information for is stored. Specifically, any numerical value from 0 to 4 is stored in the first reserved number storage area N1, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the first through gate 51 is reserved and stored. Know how many you have.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the first unit area 71 on the accessory display unit 62, the execution area AE uses the numerical information of the first electric service counter C1 stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE. This is an area for moving.

Next, the second electric service holding area 232 will be described. The second electric service holding area 232 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE, similarly to the first electric service holding area 231. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used for a lottery counter according to the winning history of the second through gate 52. The numerical information of the second electric service counter C2 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 in the holding area RE of the second electric service holding area 232. In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 in the holding area RE of the second electric service holding area 232, when the winning of the second through gate 52 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the second Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 1 holding area RE1 → 2nd holding area RE2 → 3rd holding area RE3 → 4th holding area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the second through gate 52 can be held and stored.

Further, the holding area RE of the second electric service holding area 232 includes a second holding number storage area N2, and the second through gate 52 winning history is held and stored in the second holding number storage area N2. Information for identifying the number is stored. Specifically, any numerical value from 0 to 4 is stored in the second reserved number storage area N2, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the second through gate 52 is reserved and stored. Know how many you have.

When the execution area AE of the second electric service holding area 232 starts the variable display of the second unit area 72 on the accessory display unit 62, the first hold of the hold area RE of the second electric service hold area 232 This is an area for moving the numerical information of the second electric service counter C2 stored in the area RE1.

Next, the third electric service holding area 233 will be described. The third electric service holding area 233 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE, similarly to the first electric service holding area 231. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used for a lottery counter according to the winning history of the third through gate 53. The numerical information of the third electric service counter C3 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 in the holding area RE of the third electric service holding area 233. In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 in the holding area RE of the third electric service holding area 233, when the winning of the third through gate 53 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the third Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 1 holding area RE1 → 2nd holding area RE2 → 3rd holding area RE3 → 4th holding area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the third through gate 53 can be held and stored.

Further, the holding area RE of the third electric service holding area 233 includes a third holding number storage area N3, and the winning history to the third through gate 53 is held and stored in the third holding number storage area N3. Information for identifying the number is stored. Specifically, any numerical value from 0 to 4 is stored in the third reserved number storage area N3, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the third through gate 53 is reserved and stored. Know how many you have.

The execution area AE of the third electric service holding area 233 is the third hold of the hold area RE of the third electric service hold area 233 when the variable display of the third unit area 73 on the accessory display unit 62 is started. This is an area for moving the numerical information of the third electric service counter C3 stored in the area RE3.

Here, as described above, while the game ball is allowed to pass through the second through gate 52 through the first through gate 51, the second through gate 52 is passed through the second through gate 52 without passing through the first through gate 51. It is less likely that the game ball will pass through. Therefore, it is unlikely that the number of holds (the number of winning histories), which is the number of hold information stored in the first power hold area 231, becomes smaller than the number of holds in the second power hold area 232. ..

Further, it is less likely that the game ball passes through the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51. Therefore, it is unlikely that the number of holds (number of winning histories), which is the number of hold information stored in the first power hold area 231, becomes smaller than the number of holds in the third power hold area 233. ..

Further, since the number of holds that can be held and stored in each of the electric service holding areas 231 to 233 is the same, there is a case where the number of prizes to each through gate 51 to 53 is larger than the number of holds that can be held and stored. However, the above event does not occur.

The number of holds that can be held and stored in each of the electric service holding areas 231 to 233 is set to be the same (4), but the number is not limited to this, and the winning history that can be stored for each electric service holding area 231 to 233 is not limited to this. The number may be different. In this case, in order to suppress the occurrence of the above event, the number of holds that can be held and stored in the first electric service holding area 231 is the number of holds that can be held and stored in the second electric service holding area 232 or the third electric service holding area 233. It is preferable to set the same as or more than that (N1 ≧ N2 or N3).

<About various processes executed by the main controller 101>
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed in advancing the game in each game time by the MPU 202 in the main control device 101 will be described. In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. However, description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, the reading process of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 101 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S102, the first electric service counter C1, the second electric service counter C2, and the third electric service counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the first electric service counter C1, the second electric service counter C2, and the third electric service counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the electric service counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. After that, in step S103, after executing the through winning process associated with winning each of the through gates 51 to 53, the timer interrupt process ends.

The winning process for through in step S103 will be described below.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first through gate 51. If it is determined that the game ball has not won the first through gate 51, the process proceeds to step S206, while if it is determined that the game ball has won the first through gate 51, the process proceeds to step S202 and the first hold number. It is determined whether or not the storage area N1 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment).

If the first reserved number storage area N1 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S206, while if the first reserved number storage area N1 is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S203 and the first reserved number storage area N1 Is incremented by 1.

In the following step S204, the current value of the first electric service counter C1 is stored in the first reserved area of the free reserved area 231 of the first electric service holding area 231 of the RAM 204. In step S204, a command for identifying that the first electric service counter C1 has been acquired is set and output to the voice emission control device 102. The voice emission control device 102 controls the light emission of the first hold lamp unit 91 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the hold area in which the first electric service counter C1 acquired this time is stored. The process of making the part emit light is executed.

After that, the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed in step S205, and the process proceeds to step S206. In the confirmation process for the hold notice, command information that reflects the lottery result based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is set.

The confirmation process for the hold notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S301, the value of the first electric service counter C1 acquired this time is grasped. After that, the support lottery process is executed in step S302. In the support lottery process, it is determined whether or not the first electric service counter C1 grasped in step S301 corresponds to a predetermined winning value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first electric service counter C1 is "7".

In the following step S303, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S302 is a winning result. If it is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S304, a winning hold command is set, and the confirmation process for this hold notice is completed. On the other hand, if it is not a winning result, specifically, if it is a loss result, a drop hold command is set in step S305, and the confirmation process for this hold notice is completed. These hold commands are transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 in step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 14) described later. The voice emission control device 102 grasps that the first electric service counter C1 has been acquired and the lottery result (support lottery result) of the support lottery based on the reception of each of these hold commands.

As already explained, since the winning probability of the support lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is 240/241, it is almost won.

Returning to the description of the winning process for through (FIG. 12), in step S206, it is determined whether or not the second through gate 52 has won a prize. If it is determined that the game ball has not won the second through gate 52, the process proceeds to step S210, while if it is determined that the game ball has won the second through gate 52, the process proceeds to step S207 and the second hold number. It is determined whether or not the storage area N2 is less than the upper limit value of 4.

If the second reserved number storage area N2 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S210, while if the second reserved number storage area N2 is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S208 and the second reserved number storage area N2 is incremented by 1. In the following step S209, the current value of the second electric service counter C2 is stored in the first reserved area of the free reserved area 232 of the second electric service holding area 232 of the RAM 204. In step S209, a command for identifying that the second electric service counter C2 has been acquired is set and output to the voice emission control device 102. The voice emission control device 102 controls the light emission of the second hold lamp unit 92 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the hold area in which the second electric service counter C2 acquired this time is stored. The process of making the part emit light is executed.

In step S210, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the third through gate 53. If it is determined that the game ball has not won the third through gate 53, the winning process for the main through is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the game ball has won the third through gate 53, the process proceeds to step S211. , It is determined whether or not the third reserved number storage area N3 is less than the upper limit value of 4.

If the third reserved number storage area N3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the winning process for this through is terminated as it is, while if the third reserved number storage area N3 is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S212. , The third hold number storage area N3 is incremented by 1. In the following step S213, the current value of the third electric service counter C3 is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas of the third electric service holding area 233 of the RAM 204, and the winning process for this through is completed. In step S213, a command for identifying that the third electric service counter C3 has been acquired is set and output to the voice emission control device 102. The voice emission control device 102 controls the light emission of the third hold lamp unit 93 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the hold area in which the third electric service counter C3 acquired this time is stored. The process of making the part emit light is executed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S401 to S408 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the update process of the variation type counter CS in step S410 is executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 117. Further, when various production commands such as various fluctuation commands, various hold commands, and release commands are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 102.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S403, the demo display process is executed. In the demo display process, a process of determining whether or not a predetermined start waiting time (for example, 5.0 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed in a situation where none of the through gates 51 to 53 has won a prize is executed. Then, when it is determined that the elapse has passed, a command for displaying a demo is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102. The voice emission control device 102 transmits the demo display command as it is to the display control device 212. Based on receiving the demo display command, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 81 so that the demo image is displayed on the display screen G.

After that, in steps S404 to S406, the electric service support process for driving and controlling the accessory display unit 62 and the electric accessory 41a to 43a is executed.

As described above, the accessory display unit 62 is formed with three unit regions 71 to 73, and each of the unit regions 71 to 73 is provided with the electric accessories 41a to 43a in a one-to-one correspondence. ing. Therefore, in the electric service support process, a process for controlling each unit area 71 to 73 and each electric accessory 41a to 43a is executed. Specifically, based on the winning of each through gate 51 to 53, the variation display of each unit area 71 to 73 is started, and after the variation display time elapses, each through gate 51 to 53 is started for each unit area 71 to 73. The stop result corresponding to the support lottery result based on the winning of the prize is displayed, and the process of ending the variable display is executed. Then, when the support lottery result is the winning result, the support of the electric accessories 41a to 43a is started after the end of the variation display (after the display of the stop result).

Here, while the fluctuation display of each unit area 71 to 73 is performed independently, the support of each electric accessory 41a to 43a is a situation in which one electric accessory is supported and another electric accessory is supported. There is no support for things.

Specifically, in the situation where the variation display is performed in each unit area 71 to 73, the winning variation display of one unit area ends, and the support of the electric accessory corresponding to the one unit area is started. Based on this, it is configured to stop the variable display of ordinary symbols in other unit areas. In detail, the fluctuation display is not started when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not performed in the other unit area, and the fluctuation display is performed when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed in the other unit area. It is configured to reset or pause the display. In this case, reset means invalidating the fluctuation display performed in another unit area and the lottery result that triggered the fluctuation display, and suspend means a line in another unit area. This is to suspend the counting of the fluctuation display time in the fluctuation display. The suspension of the fluctuation display is continued until the support of the electric accessory is completed. As a result, the variation display does not end in the other unit area, so that the support of the other electric accessory is not started.

Regarding the electric service support process, first, in step S404, the first electric service corresponding process related to the display control of the first unit area 71 and the drive control of the first electric accessory 41a is executed. Then, in step S405, the second electric service correspondence process related to the display control of the second unit area 72 and the drive control of the second electric accessory 42a is executed. After that, in step S406, the third electric service correspondence process related to the display control of the third unit area 73 and the drive control of the third electric accessory 43a is executed. That is, in one processing time, the variation display of the normal symbol is controlled in the order of the first unit area 71 → the second unit area 72 → the third unit area 73.

After the execution of step S406, the process proceeds to step S407 to execute the game ball launch control process. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 27 is excited once in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 118. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In the following step S408, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (stored) in the RAM 204. The power failure flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed and is deleted in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not stored, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S409, that is, the previous process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process. Then, the variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. That is, in step S410, the variation type counter CS is added by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, the variable type counter CS can be updated randomly by repeatedly updating the variable type counter CS using the remaining time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the power failure flag is stored, the power supply is cut off, so the power failure processing after step S411 is executed. That is, in step S411, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then the RAM determination value is calculated and saved in step S412, and after the access to RAM 204 is prohibited in step S413, the power supply is completely shut off for processing. Continues an infinite loop until it can no longer be executed.

<Processing for the first electric service>
Next, the first electric service correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, whether or not the variation display of the first unit region 71 is stopped based on the support of another electric accessory, specifically, the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. To judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first stopped flag is set in the stopped flag storage area 234a provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The first stopped flag is a flag for identifying that the fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 is stopped, and when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started. It is set to and is deleted when the support ends.

If the first stopped flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is being supported (opening / closing operation). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second supported flag is set in the supported flag storage area 234b provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204, and whether or not the third supported flag is set. Determine if not. The second supporting flag is a flag that is set when the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is performed and is cleared when the opening / closing operation is completed. Similar to the second supported flag, the third supported flag is a flag that is set when the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is performed and is cleared when the opening / closing operation is completed.

If both support flags are not set, the processing related to the display control of the first unit area 71 and the drive control of the first electric accessory 41a is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the off-display flag is set in the off-display flag storage area 234c provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The off display flag is a flag that is set while the off result is displayed in the first unit area 71. Then, as described above, the disengagement result is displayed in the first unit area 71 when the first electric accessory 41a is not won in the support lottery for whether or not to open the first electric accessory 41a.

If the off display flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S504, and it is determined whether or not the first electric accessory 41a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first supported flag is set in the supported flag storage area 234b provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The first supporting flag is a flag that is set when the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is performed and is cleared when the opening / closing operation is completed.

If the first supported flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S505, and it is determined whether or not the first support winning flag is set in the support winning flag storage area 234d provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. To do. The first support winning flag is a flag that is set when the support lottery for the first electric accessory 41a is won and is cleared when the first support in progress flag is set.

If the first support winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S506, and the first timer counter T1 stored in the first timer counter area 235a provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is "0". Determine if it exists. The numerical value of the first timer counter T1 is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started in a cycle of 2 msec. If the first timer counter T1 is not "0", the first electric service correspondence process is terminated as it is.

When the first timer counter T1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S507, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being displayed in the first unit area 71. If the fluctuation is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S508, and the support lottery for the first electric accessory 41a among the first electric service counter C1 (holding information) stored in the first electric service holding area 231 is selected. Determine if there is something that is not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first reserved number storage area N1 is larger than "0".

When the value of the first reserved number storage area N1 is "0", the process corresponding to the first electric service is terminated as it is, while the value of the first reserved number storage area N1 is larger than "0". In step S509, the first normal symbol variation start process for starting the variation display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 is executed, and the first electric service correspondence process is completed.

The first normal figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, a process of subtracting 1 from the first reserved number storage area N1 is executed. After that, the data setting process is executed in step S602. In the data setting process, a process of shifting the data stored in the hold areas RE1 to RE4 in the first electric service hold area 231 is executed. Specifically, the data of the first hold area RE1 is moved to the execution area AE, and the second hold area RE2 → the first hold area RE1, the third hold area RE3 → the second hold area RE2, and the fourth hold area RE4. → Move the data in each area to the lower area side, such as the third hold area RE3.

Further, in step S602, a process of setting the first shift command is executed. The shift command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 in step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 14). The voice emission control device 102 controls the emission of the first hold lamp unit 91 based on the reception of the shift command.

In the following step S603, the support lottery process is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first electric service counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is "7", which is a predetermined winning value. Then, in step S604, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S603 is a winning result. If it is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S605, and the first support winning flag is set.

After that, in step S606, "250" is set in the first timer counter T1 as the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71. As described above, the numerical value of the first timer counter T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started in a cycle of 2 msec, so that the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol this time is 0. It is 5 seconds.

After executing the process of step S606, the winning variation command is set in step S607. The winning variation command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the voice emission control device 102 by receiving the corresponding selection variation command will be described later.

On the other hand, if the support lottery for the first electric accessory 41a is not won, the process proceeds to step S608, and the variable display time lottery process for drawing the out-of-variation display time of the first unit area 71 is executed. In this process, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS at the present time is acquired, and the deviation variation display time corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS is grasped by referring to the first table TD1.

In the following step S609, a numerical value corresponding to the deviation variation display time grasped in the variation display time lottery process is set in the first timer counter T1. Specifically, for example, when 30 sec is grasped as the deviation fluctuation display time, "15000" is set for the first timer counter T1.

After that, in step S610, a deviation variation command including information for specifying the deviation variation display time is set. The deviation variation command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the voice emission control device 102 by receiving the deviation fluctuation command will be described later.

After executing the process of step S607 or step S610, the variation display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 is started in step S611, and the first normal diagram variation start process is completed.

That is, when the first electric service counter C1 is stored in the first electric service holding area 231, the pass / fail determination process (support lottery process) is executed using the first electric service counter C1 and the pass / fail determination process is performed. As an opportunity, the variable display of ordinary symbols is performed. In this case, the variation display time of the normal symbol is determined based on the winning / failing determination result (support lottery result) and the variation type counter CS.

Returning to the explanation of the first electric service correspondence process (FIG. 15), the first timer counter T1 is "0" and the variation is being displayed in the first unit area 71 in the situation where the first support winning flag is not set. In the case (step S505: NO, step S506: YES, step S507: YES), it means that the out-of-variation display of the first unit area 71 is completed. In this case, in step S510, the disengagement result is stopped and displayed in the first unit area 71 as the stop result.

In the following step S511, the off display flag is set. This makes it possible to specify that the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71 in the MPU 202.

Further, in step S511, the out-of-variation end command is set. Then, the processing for the first electric service is completed. The out-of-variation end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The voice emission control device 102 can recognize that the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 has been completed based on the reception of the deviation variation end command.

When the first support winning flag is set (step S505: YES), it is determined in step S512 whether or not the first timer counter T1 is "0". If the first timer counter T1 is not "0", the first electric service correspondence process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the first timer counter T1 is "0", it means that the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 has ended. In this case, in step S513, the winning result is stopped and displayed in the first unit area 71 as the stop result.

After that, in step S514, the first support in progress flag is set and the first support winning flag is erased.

In the following step S515, a process for starting the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is executed. Specifically, the first electric accessory drive unit 41b is controlled so that the first electric accessory 41a is in the open state.

After that, in step S516, "3000" is set in the first timer counter T1 as the opening time (time in which the first electric accessory 41a is open). As a result, 6 sec is set as the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. Then, "10" is set for the count counter CC stored in the count counter area 235b provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204. The count counter CC is a counter for grasping the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first electric service winning opening 41 in a situation where the first electric accessory 41a is in the open state.

After that, the release command is set in step S517, and the first electric service correspondence process is completed. The release command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the voice emission control device 102 by receiving the release command will be described later.

When the off display flag is not set and the first support flag is set (step S503: NO, step S504: YES), the first electric service opening / closing process is executed in step S518, and the first operation is performed. End the electric service processing.

The first electric service opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the first timer counter T1 is "0". If the first timer counter T1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S705, while if the first timer counter T1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S702 and the winning of the first electric service winning opening 41 is performed. Determine if it has occurred. If the first electric service winning opening 41 has not been won, the first electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is, while if the first electric service winning opening 41 has been won, the process proceeds to step S703. , The process of subtracting 1 from the value of the count counter CC is executed.

After that, in step S704, it is determined whether or not the count counter CC is “0”. Since "10" is set as an initial value in the count counter CC based on the fact that the first electric accessory 41a is in the open state, in the process of step S704, the first electric accessory 41a is in the open state. It can also be said that it is a process of determining whether or not the number of game balls that have won the first electric service winning opening 41 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (specifically, 10) in such a situation.

If the count counter CC is not "0", the first electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is, while if the count counter CC is "0", the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, a process of controlling the first electric accessory driving unit 41b so that the first electric accessory 41a is closed is executed.

In the following step S706, the first supporting flag is cleared in order to identify that the support of the first electric accessory 41a has ended.

After that, in step S707, a closing command is set, and the first electric service opening / closing process is completed. The closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the voice emission control device 102 by receiving the closing command will be described later.

According to such processing, the support of the first electric accessory 41a (opening of the first electric accessory 41a) is performed by (A) a predetermined time (6 sec) elapses or (B) a first electric service winning. It ends when the number of winnings in the mouth 41 reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10 pieces), or one of the events occurs.

Here, as already explained, the winning of the first electric service winning opening 41 is prohibited by the first specified regulation nail 64c. As a result, the above-mentioned event (B) cannot occur. Therefore, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is 6 sec without changing according to the winning situation.

Returning to the explanation of the first electric service correspondence process (FIG. 15), if the deviation result is displayed in the first unit area 71, the affirmative determination is made in step S503, and the deviation display correspondence process is executed in step S519. , This process for the first electric service is completed. That is, when the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71, the processes of steps S504 to S518 are not executed. In other words, when the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71, the variable display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 is not started, and the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is performed. Absent.

The out-of-display correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The deviation display correspondence process is a process for waiting for the start of the next variation display in the first unit area 71 from the end of the deviation variation display until a predetermined time elapses. If the fluctuation display is performed in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 at the end timing of the deviation fluctuation display, the fluctuation display and the support based on the fluctuation display are executed during the predetermined time. After that, the ending and the next variable display will be produced.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the standby flag is set in the standby flag storage area 234e provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. During the display of the disengagement result, the standby flag completed the variable display of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a. It is a flag that is set in the case and then erased when the time required for the ending for notifying the player that the advantageous state has ended and the effect related to the next variation display has elapsed.

If the standby flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S802 to determine whether or not either the variation display of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 or the variation display of the normal symbol in the third unit area 73 is performed. judge.

Here, when the deviation result is displayed in the first unit area 71, the new fluctuation display is not started in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. Further, whether or not the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the support of the third electric accessory 43a is performed in step S502 (or step S523) of the first electric service correspondence process (FIG. 15). Is determined, and if neither support is provided, the off-display support process is executed. Therefore, it can be said that the process of step S802 is a process of determining whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol and the support based on the variation display, which have been performed at the end timing of the deviation variation display, have ended.

If the variable display is performed in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73, the off-display corresponding process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of both the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is not performed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the support based on the fluctuation display, which were performed at the end timing of the deviation fluctuation display, are terminated. It means that you did. In this case, the process proceeds to step S803 to set the standby flag.

In the following step S804, "4000" is set for the first timer counter T1 as the waiting time until the next fluctuation display is started in the first unit area 71. As a result, 8 sec is set as the waiting time from the timing when each of the above operations is completed to the timing when the variation display in the first unit region 71 is started. The ending and the production related to the next variable display are performed using the waiting time.

Then, the ending command is set in step S805, and the process corresponding to the display of the main error is completed. The ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the voice emission control device 102 by receiving the ending command will be described later.

On the other hand, when the waiting flag is set, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the waiting time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first timer counter T1 is "0". If the first timer counter T1 is not "0", it means that the waiting time has not elapsed. In this case, the processing for handling the off-line display is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the first timer counter T1 is "0", it means that the waiting time has elapsed. In this case, in step S807, the off-display flag is erased, the standby flag is cleared, and the off-display corresponding process ends.

According to this process, the next variation display with respect to the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 is the variation display of the normal symbol and the variation display of the normal symbol that was performed at the end timing after the deviation variation display was completed. Support based on the variable display ends and does not start until the waiting time elapses thereafter. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the support based on the fluctuation display, which was performed at the end timing of the deviation fluctuation display, between the deviation fluctuation display and the next fluctuation display. At the same time, it is possible to perform an effect related to the ending and the next variation display in the first unit area 71.

The details of the ending and the effect related to the next variation display in the first unit area 71 will be described together with the process executed by the voice emission control device 102.

Returning to the description of the first electric service correspondence process (FIG. 15), if the second supported flag or the third supported flag is set (step S502: YES), in steps S520 to S522, the first step is performed. When the change display of the normal symbol is not performed in the 1 unit area 71, the change display of the normal symbol is not newly started in the 1st unit area 71, and the change of the normal symbol is made in the 1st unit area 71. If the display is being performed, the process of suspending the variable display is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S520, it is determined whether or not the variation display is performed in the first unit area 71. If the variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the process proceeds to step S521, and a pause process for maintaining the remaining variation display time of the variation display at the present time and the support lottery result related to the variation display is executed.

Specifically, the update of the first timer counter T1 is prohibited. As a result, the current first timer counter T1 is maintained. If the first support winning flag is set, the first support winning flag is maintained.

Then, the variation display of the normal symbol performed in the first unit area 71 is temporarily stopped. In this case, both "○" and "×" normal symbols are displayed blinking at the same time.

If the fluctuation display is not performed in the first unit area 71, or after the process of step S521 is executed, the first stopped flag is set in step S522 to perform the first electric service correspondence process. finish.

When the variation display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 is stopped (step S501: YES), it is determined in step S523 whether or not the second supported flag or the third supported flag is set. If either of the two supported flags is set, the first electric service correspondence process is terminated as it is, while if both supported flags are not set, steps S524 to S526 are performed. The process for canceling the suspension of the fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 is executed. In this case, when the fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 is paused, it is restarted from the paused state.

Specifically, first, in step S524, it is determined whether or not the update of the first timer counter T1 is prohibited. If the update of the first timer counter T1 is not prohibited, the process proceeds to step S526 as it is, while if the update of the first timer counter T1 is prohibited, the process proceeds to step S525 and the first timer counter T1 The prohibition of updating is lifted, and the variable display of normal symbols is resumed. As a result, the update of the first timer counter T1 is restarted.

In step S526, the first stopped flag is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S503.

That is, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started in the situation where the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in the first unit area 71, the normal symbol to be stopped The count of the variable display time is suspended while the support lottery result related to the variable display is maintained. Then, based on the end of the support, the counting of the variable display time is restarted.

By the way, when the process related to the stop release (step S524 to step S526) is executed, the process proceeds to step S503, so that the stop release and the start of the variation display can be performed at the same process times. As a result, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is terminated, the variation display of the first unit area 71 is displayed after the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. It is avoided to be started.

Specifically, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a ends in the predetermined processing times in the normal processing, the stop release of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed in the third electric service corresponding processing in the predetermined processing times. It is configured to be. Then, for the predetermined processing time, the stop release of the normal symbol is executed in the first electric service correspondence processing in the next processing time, and the variation display of the first unit area 71 may be started. Then, in the next processing round, the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 starts in the second electric service correspondence process and the third electric service correspondence process executed after the first electric service correspondence process. Can be done.

In addition, when the support of the third electric accessory 43a ends in the predetermined processing times in the normal processing, the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped in the first electric service corresponding processing in the next processing times with respect to the predetermined processing times. The release may be executed and the variable display of the first unit area 71 may be started. Then, in the next processing round, the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 starts in the second electric service correspondence process and the third electric service correspondence process executed after the first electric service correspondence process. Can be done.

According to such a configuration, the winning variation display time is set to be the same in the first unit area 71, the second unit area 72, and the third unit area 73, and the support of one electric accessory is terminated. Even if the suspension of the fluctuation display of each unit area 71 to 73 is released based on the above, the fluctuation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 ends before the first unit area 71. There is no.

In addition, after the process related to the stop release is executed, the first electric service correspondence process may be terminated as it is. In this case, the processing load related to one processing time can be reduced. However, when the winning variation display time is the same in the first unit area 71, the second unit area 72, and the third unit area 73, and the variation display of each unit area 71 to 73 is started at the same time, the second unit area The above configuration is superior in view of the fact that the variation display of the 72 and the third unit area 73 may be completed before the first unit area 71.

Further, when the fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 is stopped, the current first timer counter T1 is temporarily stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 204, and when the stop of the fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 is released, it is temporarily stored. The stored first timer counter T1 may be reset to the first timer counter T1.

<Processing for the second electric service>
Next, the second electric service correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S901, whether or not the variation display of the second unit region 72 is stopped based on the support of another electric accessory, specifically, the first electric accessory 41a or the third electric accessory 43a. Is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second stopped flag is set for the stopped flag storage area 234a provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The second stopped flag is a flag for identifying that the fluctuation display of the second unit area 72 is stopped, and when the support of the first electric accessory 41a or the third electric accessory 43a is started. It is set to and is deleted when the support ends.

If the second stopped flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not the first electric accessory 41a or the third electric accessory 43a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first supported flag or the third supported flag is set.

If both supporting flags are not set, the processing related to the display control of the second unit area 72 and the drive control of the second electric accessory 42a is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the second electric accessory 42a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second supported flag is set.

If the second supported flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S904, and it is determined whether or not the second support winning flag is set in the support winning flag storage area 234d provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. To do. The second support winning flag is a flag that is set when a winner is won in a support lottery for whether or not to open / close the second electric accessory 42a, and is cleared when the second support in progress flag is set.

If the second support winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S905, and the second timer counter T2 stored in the second timer counter area 235c provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is “0”. Judge whether or not. The second timer counter T2 is updated so that the value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started in a cycle of 2 msec. If the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the second electric service correspondence process is terminated as it is.

When the second timer counter T2 is "0", it is determined in step S906 whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being displayed in the second unit area 72. If the fluctuation is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S907, and the support lottery for the second electric accessory 42a among the second electric service counter C2 (holding information) stored in the second electric service holding area 232 is selected. Determine if there is something that is not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the second reserved number storage area N2 is larger than "0".

When the value of the second reserved number storage area N2 is "0", the processing for the second electric service is terminated as it is, while the value of the second reserved number storage area N2 is larger than "0". Determines in step S908 whether or not the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the off display flag is set.

If the off display flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S909, the second normal symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed in the second unit area 72, and the second electric power is displayed. End the role handling process.

The second normal figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the processing of steps S1001 to S1004 is the same as the processing of steps S601 to S604 of the first general diagram fluctuation start processing (FIG. 16), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If the support lottery this time is won, the affirmative judgment is made in step S1004, and the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, the second support winning flag is set, and “2” is set for the round counter RC provided in the round counter area 235d provided in various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204. The round counter RC is a counter for defining the number of times (the number of times of opening) that the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is opened in the opening / closing operation of 1.

After the execution of step S1005 or when a negative determination is made in step S1004, in step S1006, a variable display time lottery process for determining the variable display time of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 by lottery is executed. Specifically, by acquiring the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS and referring to the second table TD2, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is grasped.

Then, in step S1007, the numerical value corresponding to the lottery result in step S1006 is set in the second timer counter T2. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result in step S1006 is 1.0 sec, "500" is set for the second timer counter T2. After that, in step S1008, the variation display of the second unit region 72 is started, and the second normal diagram variation start process is completed.

Returning to the description of the second electric service correspondence process (FIG. 19), if the off display flag is set, the affirmative determination is made in step S908, and the second electric service correspondence process is terminated as it is. As a result, the second normal figure fluctuation start processing is not executed. Therefore, the variation display of the second unit area 72 is not newly started in the situation where the deviation result is displayed in the first unit area 71.

When the second timer counter T2 is "0" and the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the second unit area 72 in a situation where the second support winning flag is not set (step S904: NO, step S905: YES, Step S906: YES), which means that the out-of-range variation display of the second unit area 72 is completed. In this case, in step S910, the deviation result is stopped and displayed in the second unit area 72, and the second electric service correspondence process is terminated.

If the second support winning flag is set (step S904: YES), the process proceeds to step S911, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter T2 is “0”. If the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the second electric service correspondence process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the second timer counter T2 is "0", it means that the winning variation display of the second unit area 72 has ended. In this case, in step S912, the winning result is stopped and displayed in the second unit area 72.

In the following step S913, the second support in progress flag is set and the second support winning flag is deleted. After that, in step S914, the count counter CC is set to "10" as the upper limit of the number of game balls to be won in the second electric service winning opening 42, and the second electric service correspondence process is completed.

When the second support flag is set (step S903: YES), the process proceeds to step S915, the second electric service opening / closing process is executed, and the second electric service corresponding process is terminated. The second electric service opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the mode of opening / closing operation (support) of the second electric accessory 42a, first, the second electric accessory 42a is opened for a short time for a relatively short time, and then after a predetermined interval time, it is short. The opening time of the second electric accessory 42a is longer than that of the time opening, and the opening is performed for a long time.

Specifically, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the second electric accessory 42a is open (open state). If the second electric accessory 42a is not open, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter T2 is “0”. If the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the second electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is, while if the second timer counter T2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1103 and the second electric accessory A process of controlling the second electric accessory drive unit 42b is executed so that the 42a is opened.

Specifically, in step S1104, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is "2". Since "2" is set as the initial value of the round counter RC, when the round counter RC is "2", it means that this opening is the first (first) opening. In this case, the count stop command is set in step S1105. The count stop command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the voice emission control device 102 by receiving the count stop command will be described later.

After that, in step S1106, "250" is set in the second timer counter T2, and the second electric service opening / closing process is completed. On the other hand, when the round counter RC is not "2", in step S1107, "2750" is set in the second timer counter T2 as the opening time of the long-time opening (second opening), and this second electric service is used. The opening / closing process is completed.

If the second electric accessory 42a is not open, the process proceeds to step S1108, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter T2 is “0”. When the second timer counter T2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1109 to execute a process of controlling the second electric accessory drive unit 42b so that the second electric accessory 42a is closed.

After that, in step S1110, an update process of subtracting 1 from the round counter RC is executed.

Then, in step S1111, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is "0". If the round counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S1117, while if the round counter RC is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1112, and the second timer counter T2 is set to "500". The electric service opening / closing process is completed.

On the other hand, if the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1113 to execute a process of determining whether or not a prize has been generated in the second electric service winning opening 42. If the second electric service winning opening 42 has not been won, the second electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is, while if the second electric service winning opening 42 has been won, step S1114 is performed. Proceed and execute the update process of subtracting 1 from the count counter CC.

In the following step S1115, it is determined whether or not the count counter CC is "0". If the count counter CC is not "0", the second electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is, while if the count counter CC is "0", the second electric accessory 42a is closed in step S1116. The process of controlling the second electric accessory drive unit 42b is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1117.

In step S1117, a process of terminating the support of the second electric accessory 42a is executed. Specifically, the second supported flag is cleared. Then, in step S1118, the count restart command is set, and the second electric service opening / closing process is completed. This count restart command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the voice emission control device 102 by receiving the count restart command will be described later.

According to this process, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is started, the second electric accessory 42a is first opened for a short time. The opening time of the short-time opening is set to 0.5 sec. After the short-time opening is completed, the second electric accessory 42a is closed. The closure lasts for 1 second. Then, after the lapse of the above time, the second electric accessory 42a is opened for a long time.

The support of the second electric accessory 42a is predetermined by (A) the opening time of the second electric accessory 42a, specifically, the opening time of the short-time opening and the opening time of the long-time opening. Either the upper limit opening time (0.5 sec + 5.5 sec = 6.0 sec) is set, or (B) the number of game balls won in the second electric service winning opening 42 is set to a predetermined upper limit number (10). It continues until one of the events occurs. As a result, it is possible to adjust the privilege given to the player, and it is possible to prevent the situation where the support does not end due to the game ball not winning.

In this case, since the opening time of the short-time opening is set shorter than 0.6 sec, which is the firing cycle of the game ball, the game is played toward the second electric service winning opening 42 after the short-time opening is started. Even if the ball is fired, it is unlikely that the game ball will win a prize while it is open for a short time.

Further, since the interval time is set to be larger than the firing cycle of the game ball, the game ball is fired at least once during the interval time.

Returning to the description of the second electric service correspondence process (FIG. 19), if the first supported flag or the third supported flag is set, step S902 is determined affirmatively. Then, in steps S916 to S920, when the variation display of the normal symbol is not performed in the second unit area 72, the variation display of the normal symbol is not newly started in the second unit area 72. When the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed in the second unit area 72, a process of resetting (invalidating) or suspending the fluctuation display is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S916, it is determined whether or not the variation display is performed in the second unit area 72. If the fluctuation display is not performed, the second stop flag is set in step S920, and the second electric service correspondence process is terminated. As a result, the second normal symbol variation start process is not executed in the second electric service correspondence process (FIG. 19), so that the variation display of the normal symbol is not newly started in the second unit area 72.

On the other hand, when the variation display is performed in the second unit area 72, the process proceeds to step S917 to determine whether or not the first support flag is set.

If the first support flag is set, the process proceeds to step S918, and the variation display of the normal symbol currently being performed in the second unit area 72 and the variation for resetting the support lottery result related to the variation display. Execute the reset process. Specifically, the second timer counter T2 is initialized to "0". Further, the variable display of the normal symbol is terminated without displaying the stop result. If the second support winning flag is set, the second support winning flag is deleted.

After that, in step S920, the second stopped flag is set, and the second electric service correspondence process ends.

If the first supported flag is not set, it means that the third supported flag is set. In this case, in step S919, a pause process for maintaining the remaining fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display of the second unit area 72 at the present time and the support lottery result related to the fluctuation display is executed. Specifically, the update of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is temporarily stopped. If the second support winning flag is set, the second support winning flag is maintained.

After that, in step S920, the second stopped flag is set, and the second electric service correspondence process ends.

When the variation display of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 is stopped (step S901: YES), it is determined in step S921 whether or not the first supported flag or the third supported flag is set. If either of the two supported flags is set, the second electric service correspondence process is terminated as it is, while if both supported flags are not set, steps S922 to S924 are performed. The process for canceling the suspension of the fluctuation display of the second unit area 72 is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S922, it is determined whether or not the update of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited. If the update of the second timer counter T2 is not prohibited, the process proceeds to step S924 as it is, while if the update of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited, the process proceeds to step S923 and the update of the second timer counter T2 is performed. The prohibition of is lifted, and the variable display of the normal symbol is restarted.

After that, in step S924, the second stopped flag is cleared, and the second electric service correspondence process is completed.

According to this process, when the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started in the situation where the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in the second unit area 72, the variation display of the normal symbol currently performed is performed. Is reset. Specifically, the variable display of the normal symbol currently being performed is immediately terminated, and the support lottery result related to the variable display is deleted. As a result, after the stop of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 is released, it is based on the second electric service counter C2 stored in the second electric service holding area 232 in the second unit area 72. The variable display of the normal symbol will be newly performed.

On the other hand, when the support of the third electric accessory 43a is started in the situation where the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed in the second unit area 72, the support lottery result related to the fluctuation display of the stop target is maintained. The count of the variable display time is paused at. Then, based on the end of support for the third electric accessory 43a, the counting of the variable display time is restarted.

<Processing for the third electric service>
Next, the third electric service correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step SS1201, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the third unit region 73 is stopped based on the support of the first electric accessory 41a or the second electric accessory 42a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third stopped flag is set for the stopped flag storage area 234a provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The third stopped flag is a flag for identifying that the fluctuation display of the third unit area 73 is stopped, and when the support of the first electric accessory 41a or the second electric accessory 42a is started. It is set to and is deleted when the support ends.

If the third stopped flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the first electric accessory 41a or the second electric accessory 42a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first supporting flag or the second supporting flag is set.

If both supporting flags are not set, the processing related to the display control of the third unit area 73 and the drive control of the third electric accessory 43a is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S1203, it is determined whether or not the third electric accessory 43a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third supported flag is set.

If the third supported flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1204, and it is determined whether or not the third support winning flag is set in the support winning flag storage area 234d provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. To do. The third support winning flag is a flag that is set when a winner is won in a support lottery for whether or not to open / close the third electric accessory 43a, and is erased when the third support in progress flag is set.

If the third support winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1205, and the third timer counter T3 stored in the third timer counter area 235e provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is “0”. Judge whether or not. The third timer counter T3 is updated so that the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is decremented by 1 each time it is started in a cycle of 2 msec. If the third timer counter T3 is not "0", the third electric service correspondence process is terminated as it is.

When the third timer counter T3 is "0", it is determined in step S1206 whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being displayed in the third unit area 73. If the fluctuation is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S1207, and the third electric service counter C3 (holding information) stored in the third electric service holding area 233 is still subject to the support lottery for the third electric accessory 43a. Determine if there is something that is not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third reserved number storage area N3 is larger than "0".

When the value of the third reserved number storage area N3 is "0", the processing for the third electric service is terminated as it is, while the value of the third reserved number storage area N3 is larger than "0". Determines in step S1208 whether or not the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the off display flag is set.

If the off-display flag is set, the third electric service correspondence process is terminated as it is, while if the off-display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1209, and in the third unit area 73. The third general figure fluctuation start process for starting the variation display of the normal symbol is executed, and the third electric service correspondence process is terminated. Since the third normal figure fluctuation start process is the same as the second normal figure change start process (FIG. 20), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the second normal figure fluctuation start process and the third normal figure change start process may be executed at the same processing times of the normal process (FIG. 14). In this case, the lottery for the variable display time is performed using the same variable type counter CS.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the variation display time associated with the value of the variation type counter CS is different between the second table TD2 and the third table TD3. As a result, different fluctuation display times are selected in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 even when the same fluctuation type counter CS is used.

When the third timer counter T3 is "0" and the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the third unit area 73 in a situation where the third support winning flag is not set (step S1204: NO, step S1205: YES, Step S1206: YES), which means that the out-of-order variation display of the normal symbol is completed in the third unit area 73. In this case, in step S1210, the deviation result is stopped and displayed in the third unit area 73, and the third electric service correspondence process is terminated.

If the third support winning flag is set (step S1204: YES), the process proceeds to step S1211 to determine whether or not the third timer counter T3 is “0”. If the third timer counter T3 is not "0", the third electric service correspondence process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the third timer counter T3 is "0", it means that the winning variation display of the normal symbol in the third unit area 73 has ended. In this case, in step S1212, the winning result is stopped and displayed in the third unit area 73.

In the following step S1213, the third support in progress flag is set and the third support winning flag is deleted.

After that, in step S1214, the count counter CC is set to "10" as the upper limit of the number of game balls to be won in the third electric service winning opening 43, and the third electric service corresponding process is completed.

If the third support flag is set (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1215, the third electric service opening / closing process is executed, and the third electric service corresponding process is terminated. Since the third electric service opening / closing process is basically the same as the second electric service opening / closing process (FIG. 21), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the first supported flag or the second supported flag is set, in steps S1216 to S1220, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not performed in the third unit area 73, the third A process is executed to prevent the fluctuation display of the normal symbol from being newly started in the unit area 73, and to reset or suspend the fluctuation display of the normal symbol when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed in the third unit area 73. To do. Since the process is basically the same as steps S916 to S920 of the second electric service correspondence process (FIG. 19), the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the third unit area 73 is stopped (step S1201: YES), it is determined in step S1221 whether or not the first supported flag or the second supported flag is set. To do. If either one of the two supported flags is set, the third electric service correspondence process is terminated as it is, while if both supported flags are not set, steps S122 to S1224 are performed. The process for canceling the suspension of the fluctuation display of the third unit area 73 is executed. Since the process is basically the same as step S922 to step S924 of the second electric service correspondence process (FIG. 19), the description thereof will be omitted.

According to this process, when the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started in the situation where the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in the third unit area 73, the variation display of the normal symbol currently performed is performed. Is reset. Specifically, the variable display of the normal symbol currently being performed is immediately terminated, and the support lottery result related to the variable display is deleted. As a result, after the suspension of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the third unit area 73 is released, it is based on the third electric service counter C3 stored in the third electric service holding area 233 in the third unit area 73. The variable display of the normal symbol will be newly performed.

On the other hand, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is started in the situation where the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed in the third unit area 73, the support lottery result related to the fluctuation display of the stop target is maintained. The count of the variable display time is paused at. Then, based on the end of support for the second electric accessory 42a, the counting of the variable display time is restarted.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game, in detail, the variation display of the normal symbol in each unit area 71 to 73 and the operation of each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. (A) to (c) indicate the winning of each through gate 51 to 53, (d) to (f) indicate the execution timing of the variation display of the normal symbol in each unit area 71 to 73, and (g) to (f). (H) shows an opening / closing mode of each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a.

First, a game ball wins a prize in the first through gate 51 at the timing of t1 in a situation where each hold information, specifically, each of the electric service counters C1 to C3 is not acquired in each electric service holding area 231 to 233. .. As a result, the first electric service counter C1 is acquired, the support lottery using the first electric service counter C1 is performed, and the variation display is started in the first unit area 71. The support lottery result is the winning result. In this case, 0.5 sec is set as the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71.

After that, at the timing of t2, the game ball that has won the first through gate 51 wins the second through gate 52. As a result, the second electric service counter C2 is acquired, the support lottery using the second electric service counter C2 is performed, and the variation display is started in the second unit area 72.

That is, when the hold information is not acquired in each of the electric service hold areas 231 to 233, the variation display of the normal symbols in each unit area 71 to 73 is sequentially started at the timing of acquisition. In this case, the first through gate 51 is arranged on the upstream side with respect to the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53, and further, the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 52 or the third through gate 51 does not go through the first through gate 51. Since it is regulated to win the gate 53, the acquisition timing of the first electric service counter C1 is unlikely to be later than the acquisition timing of the other electric service counters C2 and C3. Therefore, in the situation where the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not performed in each unit area 71 to 73, the fluctuation display in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 precedes the fluctuation display in the first unit area 71. Events that are initiated are unlikely to occur.

After that, the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 ends at the timing of t3.

Here, the maximum time from the passing timing of the first through gate 51 to the passing timing of the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is shorter than the winning variation display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit region 71. As described above, the distance between the first through gate 51 and the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 is set. The shortest variation display time (0.7 sec) of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is set longer than the winning variation display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit region 71. As a result, it is easy to start the variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 during the winning variation display of the first unit area 71, and during the variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73. The winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is likely to end.

Further, at the timing of t3, the opening / closing operation (support) of the first electric accessory 41a is started based on the end of the winning variation display. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is opened.

Further, based on the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a being started (the winning variation display ends in the first unit area 71), the currently performed variation display, specifically, the second unit area The variation display of the 72 normal symbols stops. In this case, the variable display of the normal symbol that has been stopped and the support lottery result related to the variable display are reset. As a result, during the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, the variation display of the normal symbol in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 ends, and the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a The opening and closing operation is not performed.

In order to distinguish between the end of the normal fluctuation display and the stop (end) of the fluctuation display related to the reset, the stop of the fluctuation display related to the reset is indicated by an arrow in FIGS. 23 (e) to 23 (g).

After that, prizes are generated for the first through gate 51 and the third through gate 53 at the timings of t4 and t5 during the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a. In this case, since the opening / closing operation (supporting) of the first electric accessory 41a is in progress, the variation display of the normal symbol in the third unit area 73 is not started.

Then, at the timing of t6, the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is completed. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is closed. Then, in the first unit area 71, the variation display of the normal symbol is performed again. The fluctuation display is based on the occurrence of a prize in the first through gate 51 at the timing of t4. The variable display is a winning variable display. In this case, the variable display time is 0.5 sec.

Further, based on the end of the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, the stop of the variation display of the normal symbol in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is released. As a result, the variation display of the third unit area 73 based on the winning of the third through gate 53 at the timing of t5 is started. In this case, 0.7 sec, 1.0 sec, or 1,3 sec is set as the variation display time of the third unit region 73 regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination.

After that, a prize is generated for the first through gate 51 at the timing of t7. Then, at the timing of t8, the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 ends. Based on the end of the applicable selection variation display, the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is started, and the variation display currently being performed, specifically, the variation display of the normal symbol in the third unit area 73 is stopped. To do. In this case, the variable display of the normal symbol that has been stopped and the support lottery result related to the variable display are reset.

That is, when the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the winning variation display ends at a timing earlier than the end timing of the variation display of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. .. Then, based on the fact that the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is completed and the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is displayed. Stop. In this case, the variable display of the normal symbol that has been stopped and the support lottery result related to the variable display are reset. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is not performed, and only the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is performed. As already explained, since it is not possible to win a prize in the first electric accessory 41a, there are few benefits based on the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a.

By the way, as already explained, the number of holds that can be stored in each of the electric service hold areas 231 to 233 is four. Therefore, a large number of game balls pass through the first through gate 51 within a time shorter than the digestion time of the hold information, so that the number of holds stored in the first electric service hold area 231 is larger than that of the second electric. An event may occur in which the sum of the number of holds stored in both the role hold area 232 and the third electric service hold area 233 is larger (N1 <N2 + N3). In this case, variable display is performed in each unit area 71 to 73. In the above situation, when the variation display of the first unit area 71 is the winning variation display, the winning variation display is likely to end before the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. When the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is completed, the variation display of both the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is reset. That is, the winning variation display of 1 resets the variation display of 2 and the support lottery result. As a result, even if the above event occurs, the event that the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started does not occur.

After that, at the timing of t9 to t13 during the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, a prize is generated for any of the through gates 51 to 53.

Then, at the timing of t14, the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is completed, and the variation display is started in each unit area 71 to 73. In this case, it is assumed that the deviation variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, and the winning variation display is performed in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. In this case, since the deviation display time of the first unit area 71 is set longer than the fluctuation display time in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, it precedes the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71. The variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 ends.

Here, assuming that the fluctuation display time of the second unit region 72 is shorter than the fluctuation display time of the third unit region 73, the fluctuation display of the second unit region 72 ends at the timing of t15. , The opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started. Specifically, the second electric accessory 42a is opened for the first time. Based on the start of the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, the variation display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 and the third unit area 73 is temporarily stopped. As a result, while the second electric accessory 42a is open, the variation display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 or the third unit area 73 ends, and the opening and closing operations of the first electric accessory 41a and the third electric accessory 43a are completed. Is not started. In addition, in FIGS.

At the timing of the following t16, the first opening of the second electric accessory 42a is completed. Then, the second electric accessory 42a is opened for the second time at the timing of t17 when 1 sec has elapsed from the timing of t16.

After that, at the timing of t18, the end condition of the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is satisfied, and the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a ends. In this case, when the hold information (second electric service counter C2) is stored in the second electric service hold area 232, the variable display of the normal symbol based on the hold information is newly started in the second unit area 72. Will be done.

Further, based on the completion of the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, the fluctuation display that has been temporarily stopped in the first unit area 71 and the third unit area 73 is resumed. That is, the time during which the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is performed (the time from the timing of t15 to the timing of t18) is the pause time.

At the timing of the following t19, the remaining variation display time of the third unit area 73 elapses, and the variation display of the normal symbol in the third unit area 73 ends. Based on the end, the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is started. Specifically, the third electric accessory 43a is opened for the first time. Based on the start of the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a, the variation display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 and the second unit area 72 is temporarily stopped. As a result, while the third electric accessory 43a is open, the variation display of the normal symbol in the first unit region 71 or the second unit region 72 ends, and the opening and closing operations of the first electric accessory 41a and the second electric accessory 42a are completed. Is not started.

Here, the total time of the time from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15 and the time from the timing of t18 to the timing of t19 is the variable display time of the third unit region 73. In other words, the timing of t19 when the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is started is the fluctuation display time of the third unit region 73 from the timing of t14 when the fluctuation display of the third unit region 73 is started. It can be said that this is the timing at which the time including the time during which the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is performed has elapsed.

Then, the first opening is completed at the timing of t20, and the second opening is performed at the timing of t21. The second opening continues until the termination condition is met.

When the end condition of the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is satisfied at the timing of t22, the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a ends. In this case, when the hold information (third electric service counter C3) is stored in the third electric service hold area 233, the variable display of the normal symbol based on the hold information is newly started in the third unit area 73. Will be done.

Further, based on the completion of the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol that has been temporarily stopped in the first unit area 71 and the second unit area 72 is resumed. Then, at the timing of t23, the variation display of the normal symbol in the second unit region 72 ends, the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started again, and in the first unit region 71 and the third unit region 73. The variable display of normal symbols is paused.

The total time of the time from the timing of t18 to the timing of t19 and the time from the timing of t22 to the timing of t23 is the variable display time of the second unit region 72. In other words, the timing of t23 when the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started is the fluctuation display time of the second unit region 72 from the timing of t18 when the fluctuation display of the second unit region 72 is started. It can be said that this is the timing at which the time including the time during which the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is performed has elapsed.

That is, during the deviation display of the first unit area 71, the variation display of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 ends, and the opening and closing of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a The operation is performed. In this case, while the opening / closing operation of one of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is being performed, the variation display of the normal symbol in each unit area corresponding to the other electric accessory is displayed. Pauses. Then, based on the completion of the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory of 1, the variable display of the normal symbol in each unit area corresponding to the other electric accessory is restarted, and the unit area corresponding to the electric accessory of 1 is further resumed. The variable display of the normal symbol in is started. As a result, the frequency of winning the game balls to the second electric service winning opening 42 and the third electric service winning opening 43 increases in the situation where the deviation variation display of the normal symbol is performed in the first unit area 71. Therefore, the privilege given to the player is larger than that in the case where the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71.

In this case, the support interval of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a depends on the variation display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. These fluctuation display times fluctuate according to the fluctuation type counter CS. This makes it difficult to grasp the support interval based on the end timing of support. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while predicting the start timing of the support, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game during the out-of-variation display of the first unit area 71.

In particular, at the start timing of the deviation display of the first unit region 71, the fluctuation display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 may be started at the same time. In this case, the fluctuation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is determined using the same fluctuation type counter CS. In such a case, since the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS is different between the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, the fluctuation display time is different between the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. Is selected. As a result, immediately after the fluctuation display of one and the opening / closing operation based on the fluctuation display are completed, the fluctuation display of the other is finished and the opening / closing operation based on the fluctuation display is not performed.

Further, as already described, the opening / closing operation mode of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is such that after the opening is performed for a short time, the opening is performed for a long time after an interval of 1 sec. Therefore, the player confirms that the opening has been performed for a short time, and grasps the electric accessory that the opening / closing operation is performed this time. Then, during the interval of 1 sec, the game ball is launched toward the electric service winning opening provided with the electric accessory that is opened and closed this time. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning a prize in the electric service winning opening corresponding to the electric accessory that is opened and closed. In other words, it can be said that the short-time opening of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is for notifying the player of the electric accessory whose opening / closing operation is performed this time, for a short time. It can be said that the interval between the opening and the long-time opening is the time for the player to make a distinction based on the above notification.

In particular, in a situation where the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a can be supported, it is assumed that the player is paying attention to the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. .. In such a situation, since the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a, which is the object of attention, notifies the division, the player can surely confirm the notification of the division. ing.

Further, since the interval time is set longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, at least one game ball can be fired during the interval. Thereby, the launching direction of the game ball can be adjusted based on the flow mode of the game ball. Therefore, the above-mentioned division can be preferably performed.

Further, the end condition of the support includes that the total opening time of the short-time opening and the long-time opening becomes the upper limit opening time. In such a configuration, since the first opening as a notification of the division is a short-time opening, it is possible to secure a long opening time for giving a privilege to the player. As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the player while securing the profit of the player.

The opening / closing operation mode of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is not limited to this, and may be configured to be opened three times or more, for example. In this case, if the number of times of opening for a short time is increased, it becomes more noticeable, so that it is easy to grasp the opening / closing operation target. On the other hand, since it is necessary to shorten the opening time for a long time so as not to exceed the upper limit opening time, the benefits that the player can obtain tend to decrease.

Further, although the short-time opening and the long-time opening with different opening times are performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the opening may be performed a plurality of times in one opening time. In this case, the opening time may be set longer than 0.6 sec of the firing cycle of the game ball so that the game ball can enter to some extent during the opening.

In addition, the interval time is arbitrary as long as the time for performing the division is secured. However, if the interval time is set long, there is a risk that the game ball will not be fired during the interval, so-called stop striking, so the time for striking is set short within the range that can be secured. It is good to have.

Further, a plurality of opening / closing modes having different interval times may be prepared in advance, and one opening / closing mode may be selected from the plurality of opening / closing modes when the opening / closing operation is started. The above-mentioned stoppage can also be suppressed by this configuration.

The fluctuation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are repeatedly performed, and the deviation display of the first unit area 71 is displayed at the timing of t24. When the time elapses, the deviation result is displayed in the first unit area 71. In this case, the variation display of the normal symbol performed in the second unit area 72 is continuously performed.

Incidentally, as described above, the count of the deviation variation display time of the first unit area 71 is counted only when the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is not performed. That is, the time from the start timing of the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 (timing of t14) to the end timing of the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 (timing of t24) is the deviation variation display determined by lottery. It is the total time of the time and the time when the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is performed.

After that, a prize is generated for the third through gate 53 at the timing of t25. In this case, since the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71, a new variation display is not started in the third unit area 73.

Then, at the timing of t26, the variation display of the second unit region 72 ends, and the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started.

After that, the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a ends at the timing of t27. As a result, all of the fluctuation display of the second unit area 72, the fluctuation display of the third unit area 73, the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, and the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a are completed, and the standby operation is completed. Time counting starts.

Then, at the timing of t28 when the waiting time has elapsed, the display of the deviation result ends, and a new variation display is started in each unit area 71 to 73.

That is, when the deviation display of the first unit area 71 ends, the fluctuation display in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 continues without being stopped. Therefore, the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may end during the display of the deviation result of the first unit area 71. In this case, if the variation display is the winning variation display, the corresponding electric accessory opening / closing operation is performed.

On the other hand, while the deviation result of the first unit area 71 is being displayed, it is regulated that the variable display is newly started in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. That is, during the display of the deviation result of the first unit area 71, when the deviation display has already been performed in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 at the end timing of the deviation variation display, it is as usual. Processing is performed, and then a new fluctuation display is not started. That is, from the start of the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 to the start of counting the waiting time (from the timing of t14 to the timing of t27), an advantageous state advantageous to the player (privilege to the player). The second unit area 72, the third unit area 73, and the support of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are all terminated. It is a condition for ending the advantageous state.

In the present embodiment, the display time of the disengagement result is set for each of the second unit area 72, the third unit area 73, the second electric accessory 42a, and the third electric accessory 43a from the display start timing of the disengagement result. The time until the end of the operation and the standby time are combined, but the time is not limited to this, and may be set as a predetermined fixed time, for example. In this case, the fixed time is the total time required for the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the support of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a, and the standby time. It is better to set it longer than. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage because the inconvenience of ending the display of the disengagement result does not occur in the situation where each of the above operations is performed.

<About the composition for performing various productions>
Next, a configuration for performing various effects using the speaker unit 24, the symbol display device 81, and the like will be described.

First, the electrical configuration for performing various effects will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 24.

The MPU 242 is mounted on the voice emission control board 241 provided in the voice emission control device 102. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. It is an element having a built-in RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 101 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. Various commands already described are received from the main control device 101.

On the output side of the MPU 242, each of the holding lamp units 91 to 93 provided in the variable display unit 61 and the display lamp unit 23 and the speaker unit 24 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected, and the display control device 212 Is connected. The MPU 242 of the voice emission control device 102 determines the effect pattern based on the command received from the main control device 101, transmits the effect command corresponding to the effect pattern to the display control device 212, and receives the effect command from the main control device 101. The command is sent to the display control device 212 as it is.

The display control device 212 is equipped with an MPU 252, which is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257, respectively. It is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 252, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes a process corresponding to the effect command based on receiving various effect commands from the sound emission control device 102, and draws a drawing on the video RAM 257 in the VDP 255 corresponding to the process result. By executing the process, various images are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 81.

The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 81. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display device 81. The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display decorative symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and share the image data and the like in each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, and the display content of the symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Production control process executed by the voice emission control device 102>
Next, the effect control process executed by the MPU 242 of the voice emission control device 102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect control process is periodically activated by the MPU 242 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec), and one of the various effects is determined and the effect is determined based on the command received from the main control device 101. Based on the determined mode of the effect, a process or the like for causing the display screen G to display the decorative pattern in a variable manner is executed.

In the following description, the variable display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 will be described as a game time. As already explained, the game times are until the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the first unit area 71, the stop result corresponding to the support lottery result is displayed, and the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped. is there. In this case, the game times when the support lottery result is the winning result (the winning variation display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71) is the winning game times, and the game times when the support lottery result is the wrong result (first unit). The deviation variation display of the normal symbol in the area 71) is referred to as the out-of-game times. The game time of the winning game is the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71, and the game time of the out-of-game time is the deviation variation display time of the first unit area 71.

As various effects, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to the above-mentioned game times are prepared. Specifically, for the support of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game times, the hold notice effect and the time saving notice effect performed when the next game times are consecutive, and the predetermined winning game times. Based on the support of the first electric accessory 41a, when the next winning game times are discontinuous (excluding the out-of-game times and the winning game times), the time-saving normal effect performed and the advantage performed in the out-of-game times The production during the state is set.

The hold notice effect and the time saving notice effect are the contents of the hold information (first electric service counter C1) stored in the first electric service hold area 231, specifically, the support lottery result using the hold information. It is a suggestive production. The hold notice effect and the time-saving hold notice effect are the timing before the game round related to the hold information is started, specifically, the first electric accessory 41a related to the hold information immediately before the hold information. It is started at the start timing of support or during support.

Specifically, the hold notice effect is executed when the hold information related to the next game round is acquired at the start timing of the support of the first electric accessory 41a. On the other hand, the time saving hold notice effect is executed when the hold information related to the next game round is acquired during the support of the first electric accessory 41a.

In addition, the hold notice effect includes a normal hold notice effect selected when the next game time is a winning game time, an advantageous hold notice effect selected when the next game time is an out-of-game time, and an advantageous hold notice effect. Is set. Similarly, regarding the time saving hold notice effect, the time saving normal hold notice effect selected when the next game time is the winning game time and the time saving advantage selected when the next game time is the out-of-game time Hold notice production and is set.

Each normal hold notice effect is executed across the support based on the predetermined winning game times and the next game time which is the game time based on the hold information that is the production target of the normal hold notice effect. On the other hand, each advantageous hold notice effect is performed only during support based on the above-mentioned predetermined winning game times. This is to prevent each advantageous hold notice effect and the advantageous state during effect from being performed at the same time.

In the effect control process, one of the above-mentioned various effects is executed according to the status of the command received from the main control device 101 and the hold information stored in the first electric service holding area 231.

Explaining the specific processing configuration, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a hold command, specifically, a winning hold command or a loss hold command has been received. As described above, the hold command is a command that is set when the first electric service counter C1 is acquired. In particular, the winning hold command is a command set when the support lottery result using the acquired first electric service counter C1 is the winning result, and the missed hold command is the acquired first electric service. This command is set when the support lottery result using the counter C1 is an outlier result.

If the hold command is not received, the process proceeds to step S1303, while if the hold command is received, the hold command correspondence process is executed in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1303. In steps S1303 to S1315, processing corresponding to various commands other than the hold command is executed.

Here, as described above, the hold command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the voice emission control device 102 when a prize is generated in the first through gate 51 and the first electric service counter C1 is acquired. Is to be done. Therefore, depending on the timing of winning the first through gate 51, the hold command and other commands may be set in the same normal processing times. Therefore, by first executing the process related to the hold command and then executing the process corresponding to the other command after the execution of the process, there is no time lag between the hold command corresponding process and the other command corresponding process. It has become like.

The hold command correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, a process of storing the hold command information included in the received hold command in the RAM 244 of the voice emission control device 102 is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, the RAM 244 is provided with a hold command information storage area 261 for storing hold command information. The hold command information storage area 261 includes four unit storage areas 261a to 261d corresponding to the hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the first electric service hold area 231, and the hold command information storage area 261 is provided according to the reception history of the hold command. It is stored in any of the unit storage areas 261a to 261d. Specifically, when the hold command is received, the hold command information is sequentially stored in the order of the first unit storage area 261a → the second unit storage area 261b → the third unit storage area 261c → the fourth unit storage area 261d. I will go. As a result, the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the first electric service holding area 231 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 101 and the unit storage areas 261a to 261d of the holding command information storage area 261 in the RAM 244 of the voice emission control device 102 are combined. Be associated.

In addition, the hold command information includes information on the type of the hold command, specifically, whether it is a winning hold command or a lost hold command.

In the following step S1402, a process for grasping the number of the first electric service counters C1 currently acquired in the first electric service holding area 231 is executed. Specifically, the process of incrementing the hold number storage area K provided in the hold command information storage area 261 of the RAM 244 by 1 is executed. The hold number storage area K is for grasping the number of hold information to be the target of various effects, specifically, the number of the first electric service counter C1 currently acquired in the voice emission control device 102. ..

After executing the process of step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403, and it is determined whether or not the game is being played (the first unit area 71 is displaying fluctuations). It is determined whether or not the game rotation flag is set in the game rotation flag storage area 262 provided in the RAM 244. The game rotation flag is a flag that is set when the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the first unit area 71, and is specifically set when a variable command is received, and is a release command or an out-of-change variable end command. Is a flag that is cleared when is received.

If the game is in progress, the hold command correspondence process is terminated as it is, while if the game is not in progress, whether or not the first electric accessory 41a is open (supporting) is determined in step S1404. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening flag is set in the opening flag storage area 263 provided in the RAM 244. The opening flag is a flag that is set when the first electric accessory 41a is being opened, and more specifically, is a flag that is set when a release command is received and is deleted when a close command is received. is there.

If the first electric accessory 41a is not open, the process for responding to this hold command is terminated as it is, while if the first electric accessory 41a is open, the time saving notice is given in steps S1405 to S1415. Execute the process related to the production.

First, in step S1405, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag is set in the hold notice flag storage area 264 provided in the RAM 244. The hold notice flag is a flag that is set when the hold notice effect is performed, and is a flag that is cleared when the game round related to the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect is started.

When the hold notice flag is set, it means that the hold notice effect has already been performed. In this case, the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the hold notice flag is not set, the process for starting the time saving notice effect is executed in steps S1406 to S1414.

Specifically, first, the hold notice flag is set in step S1406. After that, in step S1407, the remaining opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is grasped. Specifically, the RAM 244 is provided with a timer counter area 265, and the timer counter area 265 stores a timer counter T for grasping the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. The timer counter T is set to "3000" when the first electric accessory 41a is opened, and is decremented by 1 each time the effect control process is activated. Since the effect control process is started in a cycle of 2 msec, the timer counter T becomes "0" when 6 sec, which is the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a, elapses. In step S1407, by grasping the value of the timer counter T at the present time, the remaining opening time from the present time until the first electric accessory 41a is closed is grasped.

After that, in step S1408, a process of subtracting 1 from the reserved number storage area K is executed. Then, in step S1409, the information stored in the first unit storage area 261a is stored in the execution area 261e provided in the RAM 244, and the information stored in the unit storage areas 261b to 261d is shifted. Let me. The data shift is the same as the data shift of the execution area AE of the first electric service holding area 231 and the holding areas RE1 to RE4.

In the following step S1410, among the information stored in the execution area 261e, the winning / failing information regarding the support lottery result is grasped. Then, in step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current support lottery result is a winning based on the grasped winning / failing information.

If the support lottery result is a winning game, it means that the next game is a winning game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1412 and the process of selecting the effect time corresponding to the remaining opening time grasped in step S1407 is executed. Specifically, a plurality of production times (for example, 0.5 sec, 1.0 sec, 1.5 sec, ..., 5.5 sec, 6.0 sec) are preset as the effect time within a numerical range of 0 to 6.5 sec. Therefore, one production time corresponding to the remaining opening time is selected from the plurality of production times. Specifically, among the plurality of production times, the maximum time within a range smaller than the total time of the remaining open time and the winning game round time of 0.5 sec is selected. For example, when the remaining opening time is 1.7 sec, 2.0 sec is selected as the effect time.

After that, in step S1413, the time-saving normal hold notice effect corresponding to the effect time selected in step S1412 is started, and the process for responding to the hold command is completed.

Specifically, the ROM 243 of the voice emission control device 102 is provided with various data table storage areas 271, and the various data table storage areas 271 are provided with a plurality of types of data tables corresponding to a plurality of types of effects. Is set. In the data table, an audio output pattern and a light control pattern for producing an effect are set. In step S1413, among the plurality of types of data tables, the data table corresponding to the time saving normal hold notice effect is read out.

Here, a plurality of types of data tables corresponding to the time-saving normal hold notice effect are prepared in advance corresponding to a plurality of effect times. In step S1413, among the data tables corresponding to the plurality of types of time-saving normal hold advance notice effects, the data table corresponding to the effect time selected in step S1408 is read, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area. To do. As a result, the production of audio and light corresponding to the time-saving normal hold notice production is started.

Further, in step S1413, an effect command corresponding to the time saving normal hold notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. The effect command includes specific information for specifying the effect time selected in step S1412. When the display control device 212 receives the above-mentioned effect command, the display control device 212 grasps the current effect time from the specific information included in the effect command. Then, the display control of the symbol display device 81 is performed so that the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the effect command and the effect time is performed on the display screen G.

Specifically, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a data table for so that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed on the display screen G. A plurality of types of the data table are prepared in advance corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is different for each. When the display control device 212 receives an effect command corresponding to the time-saving normal hold notice effect, the display control device 212 corresponds to the time-saving normal hold notice effect among a plurality of types of data tables, and corresponds to the current effect time. The data table is read, and the time saving normal hold notice effect is started on the display screen G according to the read data table.

A specific mode of the display screen G in the time saving normal hold notice effect will be described in detail. When the time-saving normal hold notice effect is started, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. After that, at a timing earlier than the elapsed timing of the above-mentioned effect time, the variation display of the decorative symbols is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and as a result of the stop, each effective line L1 to L5 Temporarily displayed on the top with the combination of decorative symbols swinging slightly. After that, at the timing when the above-mentioned effect time elapses, the combination of the detached decorative symbols is stopped (confirmed) and displayed, and the time saving normal hold notice effect ends. As a result, the player can grasp that the next game round is the winning game round, that is, the player does not shift to the advantageous state. The stop display of the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols is maintained until a new effect is started.

In this case, the variation display time of the decorative symbol is varied in accordance with the variation of the production time. Specifically, in each data table corresponding to the time saving normal hold notice effect, the time from the provisional display of the detached decorative symbol to the stop display is constant regardless of each effect time. The time from the start timing of the change of the decorative symbol to the temporary display of the decorative symbol is set according to each effect time. As a result, regardless of the effect time, the time from the temporary display of the detached decorative pattern to the stop display is constant.

It should be noted that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is arbitrary as long as the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at the elapsed timing of the production time. For example, the combination of the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed at the elapsed timing of the effect time without being temporarily displayed.

Further, for example, the decorative symbol is provisionally displayed after the high-speed fluctuation display (low identification fluctuation display) of the decorative symbol is first started, and then the low-speed fluctuation display (high identification fluctuation display) whose fluctuation display speed is lower than the high-speed fluctuation display is performed. It may be configured to display or stop. In this case, it is preferable to shorten the time during which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed out of the two fluctuation displays in accordance with the remaining opening time. As a result, the production time can be suitably changed while reducing the discomfort given to the player.

Further, the same applies to the variable display of the decorative pattern in the other effects described below.

On the other hand, when the support lottery result is a missed result, it means that the next game round is a missed game round. In this case, in step S1414, a process of selecting an effect time corresponding to the remaining opening time grasped in step S1407 is executed. Specifically, the maximum time within a range smaller than the remaining opening time is selected from the plurality of production times. For example, when the remaining opening time is 1.7 sec, 1.5 sec is selected as the effect time.

After that, in step S1415, the time saving advantageous hold notice effect corresponding to the effect time selected in step S1414 is selected, and the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated. Specifically, the various data table storage areas 271 of the ROM 243 of the voice emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 each store data tables corresponding to the time saving advantageous hold notice effect. A plurality of types of each data table are prepared in advance corresponding to a plurality of production times. In step S1415, the voice emission control device 102 reads out the data table corresponding to the effect time selected this time, and sets the read data table in the effect execution area.

Further, in step S1415, an effect command corresponding to the time saving advantageous hold notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. The effect command includes specific information for specifying the effect time selected in step S1414. When the display control device 212 receives the above-mentioned effect command, the display control device 212 grasps the current effect time from the specific information included in the effect command. Then, among the plurality of types of data tables corresponding to the time saving advantageous hold notice effect, the data table corresponding to the current effect time is read, and the time saving advantageous hold notice effect is started on the display screen G according to the read data table. ..

A specific aspect of the display screen G in the time saving advantageous hold notice effect will be described in detail. When the time saving advantageous hold notice effect is started, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. After that, at a timing earlier than the elapsed timing of the above-mentioned effect time, the variation display of the decorative symbols is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and at least of the effective lines L1 to L5. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols is temporarily displayed on the effective line of 1. After that, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped (confirmed) and displayed at the timing when the above-mentioned effect time has elapsed, and the time-saving advantage hold notice effect ends. As a result, the player can grasp that the next game round is an out-of-game round, that is, the transition to an advantageous state.

According to this process, when the hold command information is acquired in a situation where the first electric accessory 41a is open and the hold notice effect is not executed, the time is usually shortened based on the acquired hold command information. Hold notice effect or time saving advantageous hold notice effect is executed.

In this case, for the time saving normal hold notice effect, the time obtained by combining the remaining opening time of the first electric accessory 41a and the time related to the game times after the opening of the first electric accessory 41a (winning game times) , Time saving Normal hold It is secured as the production time of the notice production. As a result, it is possible to secure a longer time than the winning game round time as the production time of the time-saving normal hold notice effect, and it is possible to diversify the time-saving normal hold notice effect.

On the other hand, with respect to the time-saving advantageous hold notice effect, the remaining opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is secured as the effect time of the time-saving advantage hold notice effect. As a result, even when the effect during the advantageous state is performed in the next game time (out-of-game time), the time saving advantageous hold notice effect can be performed.

Not limited to the above configuration, it is sufficient that at least a part of the remaining opening time of the first electric accessory 41a can be secured as the production time of the time-saving normal hold notice effect or the time-saving advantage hold notice effect. However, in view of ensuring the diversity of these hold notice effects, it is better to use the configuration that maximizes the remaining opening time.

Returning to the description of the effect control process (FIG. 25), in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received. As described above, the release command is a command set when the first electric accessory 41a is released. When the release command is received, the release command corresponding process is executed in step S1304, and the process proceeds to step S1315.

The open command correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, "3000" is set for the timer counter T.

In the following step S1502, it is determined whether or not the hold command information stored in the hold command information storage area 261 exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold number storage area K is "1" or more. When the value of the hold number storage area K is "1" or more, the process of determining the hold notice effect according to the hold command information stored in the hold command information storage area 261 in steps S1503 to S1509 is performed. Execute. In this case, the processes of steps S1503 to S1507 are the same as the processes of steps S1406 and S1408 to S1411 in the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 26), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

If the support lottery result of the hold information that is the target of this hold notice effect is the winning result, that is, if the next game time is the winning game time, step S1507 is positively determined, and the normal hold notice effect is produced in step S1508. Is started to end the processing corresponding to this release command. Specifically, various data table storage areas 271 of ROM 243 of the voice emission control device 102 and program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 each store data tables corresponding to the normal hold notice effect. In step S1508, the data table corresponding to the normal hold notice effect is read from the various data table storage areas 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

Further, in step S1508, an effect command corresponding to the normal hold notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. When the display control device 212 receives the effect command, the display control device 212 reads a data table corresponding to the normal hold notice effect from the program ROM 253, and starts the normal hold notice effect on the display screen G according to the read data table.

In each data table corresponding to the normal hold notice effect, a time (6.5 sec) is set as the effect time, which is the sum of the opening time (6 sec) of the first electric accessory 41a and the winning game round time (0.5 sec). Has been done. That is, the normal hold notice effect is performed over the opening of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game times and the next game time (winning game time).

The specific mode of the display screen G in the normal hold notice effect is the same as that of the time-saving normal hold notice effect except that the variable display time of the decorative symbol is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the support lottery result of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect this time is an out-of-order result, that is, if the next game round is an out-of-game round, step S1507 is negatively determined and an advantageous hold is made in step S1509. The notice production is started and the processing corresponding to this release command is completed. Specifically, various data table storage areas 271 of ROM 243 of the voice emission control device 102 and program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 store data tables corresponding to the advantageous hold notice effect, respectively. In step S1509, the data table corresponding to the advantageous hold notice effect is read from the various data table storage areas 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

Further, in step S1509, an effect command corresponding to the advantageous hold notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. When the display control device 212 receives the effect command, the display control device 212 reads a data table corresponding to the advantageous hold notice effect from the program ROM 253, and starts the advantageous hold notice effect on the display screen G according to the read data table.

The opening time (6 sec) of the first electric accessory 41a is set as the effect time in each data table corresponding to the advantageous hold notice effect. That is, the advantageous hold notice effect is performed only during the opening of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game times.

The specific mode of the display screen G in the advantageous hold notice effect is the same as that of the time-saving advantageous hold notice effect except that the variable display time of the decorative symbol is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

According to such a configuration, when the holding command information related to the next game round is stored in the hold command information storage area 261 and the opening of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game round is started, The hold notice effect (normal hold notice effect or advantageous hold notice effect) corresponding to the hold command information (support lottery result) is executed. In this case, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning game times is secured as the production time of the hold notice effect. As a result, the hold notice effect can be preferably performed.

That is, with respect to the normal hold notice effect, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning game times and the time of the next game time (winning game time) are secured as the production time of the normal hold notice effect. As a result, it is possible to diversify the normal hold notice effect by the amount of the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a.

On the other hand, regarding the advantageous hold notice effect, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is secured as the effect time of the advantageous hold notice effect. As a result, even when the effect during the advantageous state is performed in the next game time (out-of-game time), the advantageous hold notice effect can be performed.

In particular, the production time of each hold notice effect is longer than the effect time of each time reduction hold notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the hold notice effect as compared with each time-saving hold notice effect.

Not limited to the above configuration, it is sufficient that at least a part of the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a can be secured as the production time of each of the above-mentioned hold notice effects. For example, the production time of the normal hold notice effect may be shorter than the total time of the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a and the winning game round time. Further, the effect time of the advantageous hold notice effect may be shorter than the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. However, in view of ensuring the diversity of each of the above-mentioned hold notice effects, it is better to secure the entire opening time of the first electric accessory 41a as the effect time.

By the way, if the value of the hold number storage area K is not "1" or more (step S1504: NO), the process corresponding to this release command is terminated as it is. In this case, no new effect is performed until the time-saving hold notice effect based on the acquisition of the hold information related to the next game time is performed, and the stop result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the previous game time is continuously displayed.

The configuration is not limited to the above, and for example, a predetermined effect may be produced while the first electric accessory 41a is being supported. In this case, if the hold information related to the next game round is acquired during the predetermined effect, the effect may be switched so that the time-saving hold notice effect is started instead of the predetermined effect.

As the predetermined effect, for example, it is preferable that the effect is continuous with the time saving hold notice effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when switching to the time saving hold notice effect.

Returning to the description of the effect control process (FIG. 25), if the release command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1305 to determine whether or not a variation command (winning variation command or loss variation command) has been received. As described above, the variation command is transmitted when the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the first unit area 71. If a variable command has been received, the variable command correspondence process is executed in step S1306 to proceed to step S1315.

The variable command correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1601, the type of variable command is grasped. Specifically, it grasps whether the received variable command is a winning variable command or a deviated variable command. Then, in step S1602, it is determined whether or not the variable command received this time is a winning command.

If it is a winning variation command, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the hold notice flag is set.

If the hold notice flag is not set, the hold notice effect or the time saving notice effect is executed based on the hold information (first electric service counter C1) that triggered the winning game times (winning fluctuation command setting) this time. It means that it has not been done. In this case, in steps S1604 to S1606, the process related to the time saving normal effect is executed.

Here, in the hold notice effect or the time saving notice effect, when the hold information related to the next game time is acquired by the time the opening (support) of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game time is completed. It is done in. Therefore, it can be said that the negative determination of step S1603 is discontinuous with the opening of the first electric accessory 41a in this winning game, and the time saving normal effect is the opening of the first electric accessory 41a. It can be said that it is executed in the non-continuous winning game times.

Specifically, regarding the process related to the time saving normal effect, first, the processes of step S1604 and step S1605 are executed. Since these processes are the same as those already described, the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in step S1606, the time-saving normal effect is started and the process corresponding to the variable command is completed. Specifically, various data table storage areas 271 of ROM 243 of the voice emission control device 102 and program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 store data tables corresponding to the time saving normal effect, respectively. In step S1606, a data table corresponding to the time-saving normal effect is read from the ROM 243, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

Further, in step S1606, a process of transmitting an effect command corresponding to the time-saving normal effect to the display control device 212 is executed. Based on the above-mentioned effect command, the display control device 212 reads a data table from the program ROM 253 so that the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the time-saving normal effect is performed on the display screen G, and the read data table. According to this, the time saving normal effect is started on the display screen G.

A specific aspect of the display screen G in the time-saving normal effect will be described in detail. When the time-saving normal effect is started, the decorative symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily hidden. Immediately after that, the combination of the decorative symbols is tentatively displayed on each effective line L1 to L5 in a slightly oscillated state. After that, when the above-mentioned effect time elapses, the combination of the detached decorative symbols is stopped (confirmed) and displayed, and the time-saving normal effect ends.

Here, the same time (0.5 sec) as the winning game round time is set as the effect time in each data table corresponding to the time saving normal effect stored in the voice emission control device 102 and the display control device 212. .. In other words, the time-saving normal production is a production performed over the winning game times.

On the other hand, when the hold notice flag is set, it means that the normal hold notice is being produced or the time saving normal hold notice is being produced. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1607, the hold notice flag is cleared, and the variable command correspondence process ends.

That is, when the opening of the first electric accessory 41a and the game times are continuous, during the opening of the first electric accessory 41a, a hold notice effect or a time saving notice effect for the hold information of the next game time is performed. Will be executed.

In this case, if the hold information (and the corresponding hold command information) has already been acquired at the release timing of the first electric accessory 41a, the entire release time of the first electric accessory 41a is the hold notice effect. It is secured as a production time. On the other hand, when the hold information is acquired during the opening of the first electric accessory 41a, the remaining opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is secured as the effect time of the time saving hold notice effect.

On the other hand, when the opening of the first electric accessory 41a and the game times are discontinuous (excluding the off-game times and the winning game times) and the game times are the winning game times. , Short-time normal production is performed over the winning game times.

On the other hand, when the received variable command is not the winning variable command (step S1602: NO determination), it means that the missed variable command has been received. In this case, in step S1608, the deviation variation display time is grasped from the specific information included in the deviation variation command.

After that, in step S1609, a process for displaying the remaining advantageous time is executed. Specifically, as the remaining advantageous time, a specific command for which the deviation variation display time grasped in the previous step S1608 is set is transmitted to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 displays the deviation variation display time on the display screen G based on the reception of the specific command, and starts the countdown of the deviation variation display time. Specifically, the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212 is provided with a timer counter for counting display for measuring the time. Based on the reception of the specific command, the display control device 212 sets the value corresponding to the deviation display time in the count display timer counter, and updates the count display timer counter by subtracting 1 at a predetermined cycle. .. This makes it possible to grasp the remaining advantageous time based on the timer counter for count display. Then, the remaining advantageous time displayed on the display screen G is updated every time the count display timer counter is updated or once for each update.

After the processing of step S1609 is executed, the effect in the advantageous state is started in step S1610, and the processing corresponding to this variation command is ended. Specifically, various data table storage areas 271 of ROM 243 of the voice emission control device 102 and program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 store data tables corresponding to the effect during the advantageous state, respectively. In step S1610, the data table corresponding to the effect during the advantageous state is read from the ROM 243, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

Further, in step S1610, a process of transmitting an effect command corresponding to the effect during the advantageous state to the display control device 212 is executed. Based on the above-mentioned effect command, the display control device 212 reads a data table from the program ROM 253 for causing a series of movies corresponding to the effect during the advantageous state to be performed on the display screen G, and follows the read data table. The above movie is played on the display screen G.

For example, 90 sec is set as the playback time of the movie, and the movie is repeatedly played until the ending is started (until the end of the advantageous state).

Returning to the description of the effect control process (FIG. 25), if the variable command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1307 to determine whether or not the count stop command has been received. As described above, the count stop command is set when the support (opening / closing operation) of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started.

If the count stop command has been received, the count stop process is executed in step S1308, and the process proceeds to step S1315. In the count stop process, it is confirmed that the remaining advantageous time is counted down on the display screen G, and if the remaining advantageous time is counted down on the display screen G, the remaining advantageous time is counted down. Executes the process for suspending.

Specifically, the process of transmitting the count stop command to the display control device 212 as it is is executed. The display control device 212 confirms that the remaining advantageous time is being counted down based on the reception of the count stop command. Then, when it is confirmed that the remaining advantageous time is being counted down, the update of the count display timer counter is prohibited, and the remaining advantageous time at that time is blinked and displayed.

On the other hand, if the count stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1309 to determine whether or not the count restart command has been received. As described above, the count restart command is set when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is terminated.

If the count restart command has been received, the count restart process is executed in step S1310, and the process proceeds to step S1315. In the count restart process, it is confirmed on the display screen G that the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is paused, and if the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is paused, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is paused. Executes the process for canceling.

Specifically, the process of transmitting the count restart command to the display control device 212 as it is is executed. Based on the reception of the count restart command, the display control device 212 releases the prohibition of updating the count display timer counter, and lights and displays the remaining advantageous time.

According to such a configuration, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time, and in detail, the update of the timer counter for the count display is not performed during the support of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a. As a result, the remaining advantageous time displayed on the display screen G and the deviation variation display time on the main control device 101 can be synchronized.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, the main control device 101 periodically transmits a command in which information on the out-of-range fluctuation display time is set to the display control device 212 via the voice emission control device 102. May be.

Further, the display control device 212 may be provided with a real-time clock, and the time may be grasped by the real-time clock. The point is that the deviation fluctuation display time can be grasped, the deviation fluctuation display time is displayed as a countdown, and the countdown display is stopped while the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is supported. If so, the specific processing is arbitrary.

If the count restart command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1311, and it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received. As described above, the ending command is a command that is set when the advantageous state ends.

If the ending command has been received, the ending is started in step S1312 and the process proceeds to step S1315. Specifically, the data tables corresponding to the endings are stored in the various data table storage areas 271 of the ROM 243 of the voice emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212, respectively. In step S1312, the data table corresponding to the ending is read from the various data table storage areas 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

Further, in step S1312, a process of transmitting an effect command corresponding to the ending to the display control device 212 is executed. Based on the above effect command, the display control device 212 reads a data table from the program ROM 253 so that the ending movie corresponding to the ending is performed on the display screen G, and displays the ending movie according to the read data table. Play on screen G. The playback time of the ending movie is set to 2 sec.

If the ending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1313, and it is determined whether or not it is the ending end timing. If it is the ending end timing, the process proceeds to step S1314, the hold notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1315. In the hold notice effect determination process, the processes of steps S1503 to S1509 of the release command correspondence process (FIG. 27) are executed. As a result, when the hold command information related to the next game round is acquired, the hold notice effect is executed. The hold notice effect corresponds to the hold information that triggered the fluctuation display in the first unit area 71 after the waiting time has elapsed.

In step S1315, other processing based on the reception of other commands is executed. The other processes include a light emission control process when a command related to each hold lamp unit 91 to 93 is received, a setting and erasing process of various flags such as a game rotation flag and an open flag. Then, after executing the process of step S1315, the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated.

<Relationship between the flow of the game and various effects and the display mode displayed on the display screen G>
Next, the relationship between the flow of the game and various effects and the display mode displayed on the display screen G will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

FIG. 29 (a) shows the winning of the first through gate 51, FIG. 29 (b) shows the presence / absence of the variation display of the first unit area 71, and FIG. 29 (c) shows the support of the first electric accessory 41a. 29 (d) shows the execution timing of the time-saving normal effect, FIG. 29 (e) shows the execution timing of the normal hold notice effect, and FIG. 29 (f) shows the execution timing of the time-saving advantageous hold notice effect. 29 (g) shows the execution timing of the effect during the advantageous state, FIG. 29 (h) shows the opening / closing mode of the second electric accessory 42a, and FIG. 29 (i) shows the execution timing of the ending.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the display screen G at each timing. Specifically, FIG. 30A shows the timing of t33, FIG. 30B shows the timing of t35, and FIG. (C) is the timing of t36, FIG. 30 (d) is the timing of t37, FIG. 30 (e) is the timing of t38, FIG. 30 (f) is the timing of t39, and FIG. 30 (g) is the display screen at the timing of t41. The display mode of G is shown. In FIGS. 30 (e) to 30 (g), the movie is actually played, but for convenience of explanation, the display of the movie image is omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), a prize is generated in the first through gate 51 at the timing of t31 when the electric accessories 41a to 43a are not supported even during the game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the game round (variation display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71) is started. This game time is a winning game time.

Further, at the timing of t31, since the electric accessories 41a to 43a are not supported even during the game round, the winning game round is started almost at the same time as the winning of the first through gate 51. Therefore, the hold command information and the winning variation command are transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 almost at the same time. In this case, the hold command correspondence process is performed before the variable command correspondence process.

Specifically, after the hold number storage area K is added by 1 and the hold command information is stored in the first unit storage area 261a of the hold command information storage area 261, the hold number storage area K is subtracted by 1 and stored as described above. The held command information is stored in the execution area 261e. Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), the time-saving normal effect is started.

After that, at the timing of t32, a prize is generated in the first through gate 51, and the first electric service counter C1 is acquired. As a result, the hold command is transmitted from the main control device 101, and the hold command information is stored in the hold command information storage area 261. The first electric service counter C1 acquired this time corresponds to the winning value. That is, the next game round is the winning game round.

As described above, when the hold command is received during the game round, the time saving hold notice effect is not executed (see step S1403 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 26)). Therefore, the time-saving normal effect and the time-saving hold notice effect do not occur at the same time.

At the timing of t33, the winning game round ends, and support for the first electric accessory 41a is started (see FIG. 29 (c)). Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is opened. In this case, the release command is transmitted and the release command corresponding process is executed. As a result, the next game round, specifically, the hold notice effect corresponding to the hold command information acquired at the timing of t32, and in detail, the normal hold notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 30 (a). , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

After that, the support of the first electric accessory 41a ends at the timing of t34 when the opening time (6 sec) of the first electric accessory 41a has elapsed. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is closed. Then, the game times based on the hold information acquired at the timing of t32, in detail, the winning game times are started. After that, the winning game round ends at the timing of t35 when the winning variation display time of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 elapses, and the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started.

Here, since the production time of the normal hold notice effect is set to the time obtained by combining the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a and the winning variation display time, the normal hold notice effect is performed at the timing of t35. finish. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the combination of the detached decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

At the timing of t36, a prize is generated in the first through gate 51, and the first electric service counter C1 is acquired. The first electric service counter C1 corresponds to an outlier. Based on the acquisition of the first electric service counter C1, the hold command related to the next game round is transmitted. In this case, since the first electric accessory 41a is open, the time-saving hold notice effect, more specifically, the time-saving advantage hold notice effect is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30 (c), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The production time of the above-mentioned time saving advantageous hold notice effect is set to be slightly shorter than the remaining opening time of the first electric accessory 41a.

After that, the time saving advantageous hold notice production ends at the timing of t37, which is a timing slightly before the timing of t38 when the first electric accessory 41a closes. In this case, as shown in FIG. 30D, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line of 1 (specifically, the downward-sloping line L4). As a result, it is possible to grasp that the transition to the advantageous state, specifically, that the next game round is an out-of-game round.

Then, at the timing of t38, the first electric accessory 41a is closed, and the off-game round is started.

According to such a configuration, when the opening of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game times and the next game time are continuous, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is used for the next game time. Hold notice production related to. As a result, the production time of the production related to the game times can be secured longer than the game time, and the production related to the game times can be diversified.

Here, in order to ensure the smooth progress of the game, it is preferable to set the game rotation time short. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the winning game times are performed at a higher frequency than the out-of-game times, the winning game times can be set shorter than the out-of-game times to ensure smooth progress of the game. it can. However, if the winning game round time is set short, the effect related to the game round performed on the display screen G, in detail, the type of the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is restricted, and the degree of attention to the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced. There is a risk of

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the production related to the winning game times (various normal hold notice effects) is started during the support based on the winning game times executed at the timing before the winning game times. To. As a result, it is possible to secure the production time for performing the production related to the winning game times, so that it is possible to shorten the winning game times time while ensuring the diversification of the production related to the winning game times. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production related to the winning game times while aiming for the smooth progress of the game.

Further, at the timing of t38, the deviation fluctuation command is transmitted, and the effect during the advantageous state is started based on the deviation fluctuation command. In detail, the movie is repeatedly played on the display screen G.

Further, based on the start of the effect during the advantageous state, the display of the remaining advantageous time is started as shown in FIG. 30 (e). The remaining advantageous time is counted down with the deviation fluctuation display time as the initial value.

After that, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is started at the timing of t39, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is temporarily stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 30 (f), the remaining advantageous time at the pause timing is displayed blinking. Due to the drawing, the blinking status is underlined.

Then, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a ends at the timing of t40, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is restarted.

At the timing of t41, the off-game round ends. In this case, the countdown is completed, and as shown in FIG. 30 (g), it is displayed that the remaining advantageous time is "0".

Further, although not shown, the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in the second unit area 72 at the timing of t41 (the end timing of the out-of-game game). Therefore, the production is continued as it is during the advantageous state. It should be noted that the variation display of the normal symbol in the third unit area 73 is not performed.

After that, the support of the second electric accessory 42a based on the variation display of the normal symbol in the second unit region 72 is started, and when the support ends at the timing of t42, the advantageous state ends. In this case, the effect during the advantageous state ends, and the ending movie is played.

Then, when the ending movie ends at the timing of t43, the hold notice production starts. The hold notice effect is based on the next game round, and more specifically, based on the hold command information stored in the first unit storage area 261a in the hold command information storage area 261. If the next game is a winning game, the normal hold notice effect is executed.

Then, the waiting time elapses at the timing of t44, and the normal hold notice effect ends.

That is, the waiting time (8 sec) is set to a total time of the ending effect time (2 sec) and the hold notice effect effect time (6 sec). As a result, during the waiting time, it is possible to perform the ending and the hold notice effect corresponding to the next game time for the out-of-game time.

The configuration is not limited to the above, and for example, a configuration without an ending may be used. As a result, the time between the off-game round and the next game round can be shortened. Therefore, the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, instead of the hold notice effect, a time-saving hold notice effect may be performed. As a result, it is possible to further shorten the time between the off-game round and the next game round. Further, instead of the hold notice effect, a time-saving normal effect may be performed in the next game time for the out-of-game time. In this case, the time required for the hold notice effect can be omitted, and the time between the out-of-game times and the next game times can be further shortened. However, from the viewpoint of the diversity of the effects related to the next game time with respect to the out-of-game time, it is preferable to set a longer time between the out-of-game time and the next game time.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

It is configured so that the variable display can be performed independently in each of the unit areas 71 to 73, and when the winning variable display is completed in the first unit area 71, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 The variation display was reset so that the new variation display would not be started in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 thereafter. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which each support lottery is performed independently and each support lottery result is related.

Further, when the winning variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 is completed, the counting of the variation display time in the variation display of the other unit areas is temporarily stopped, and then the winning variation display is related to the above. The above count is restarted based on the end of support. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support of another electric accessory from occurring during the support of one electric accessory while utilizing the support lottery result and the variable display time until the temporary stop.

Further, when the deviation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 is completed, the count of the fluctuation display time in the fluctuation display of the other unit areas is not temporarily stopped. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the variable display of other unit areas, and to pay attention to the variable display of each unit area step by step.

Further, the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71 is set shorter than the variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, and the deviation variation display time of the first unit area 71 is set to the second unit area 72. And it was set longer than the variable display time of the third unit area 73. As a result, when the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the support of the first electric accessory 41a is prioritized over the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. On the other hand, when the deviation variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is given priority. There is. Therefore, it is possible to determine which support is preferentially performed according to the variation display mode of the first unit area 71.

By passing through each through gate 51 to 53, the variation display of the normal symbol is independently performed in each unit area 71 to 73, and after passing through the first through gate 51, the second through gate is further passed. These positional relationships were set so as to pass through the 52 or the third through gate 53. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an event in which the fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 and the fluctuation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 occur at the same time is positively performed.

In such a configuration, the regulation nail 64b is provided so that the game ball does not pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51. As a result, it is possible to avoid an event in which only the fluctuation display of the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 is performed, and the simultaneous fluctuation display can be preferably performed.

Further, since the start timing of the variation display of the first unit area 71 tends to be earlier than the start timing of the variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73, the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is displayed. , It is easy to end before the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. As a result, the support of the first electric accessory 41a can be given priority over the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a.

During the support of the first electric accessory 41a, a hold notice effect is provided to notify whether or not an advantageous state is obtained, specifically, to notify the support lottery result that triggered the next game round. As a result, it is possible to secure the production time of the production related to the game times longer than the game time, so that it is possible to diversify the production for notifying the support lottery result.

In particular, if the game rotation time is shortened from the viewpoint of improving the digestibility of the game, the production time of the production related to the game rotation tends to be shortened. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the production time of the production related to the game times can be secured longer than the game time, the digestion rate of the game is increased and the production related to the game times is diversified. Can be planned.

Further, when the game times are the winning game times, the first electric accessory 41a is supported after the winning game times are completed, and the first unit area 71 is supported during the support of the first electric accessory 41a. The configuration is such that a new fluctuation display is not started. In this case, a time related to the support of the first electric accessory 41a may inevitably occur between the predetermined game times and the next game times. In such a configuration, since the hold notice effect is configured to be performed over the time related to the support and the game round time, the inevitably possible time can be preferably used. As a result, the hold notice effect can be performed by suitably utilizing the time related to the support of the first electric accessory 41a.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the advantageous state is the state in which the deviation variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the effect related to the game round starts the deviation variation display in the first unit area 71. It needs to be started before it is done. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the various hold notice effects as the effects related to the game times are performed using the support time on the earlier side than the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the effect. It has become. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect related to the game times before the deviation variation display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect related to the game times from becoming meaningless because the effect related to the game times is performed after the transition to the advantageous state.

The second electric service winning opening 42 and the third electric service winning opening 43 are provided so that the winning frequencies for both are different depending on the launch mode of the game ball. Specifically, the second electric service winning opening 42 and the third electric service winning opening 43 are arranged laterally at predetermined intervals. As a result, the game is performed in which the launch mode of the game ball is changed according to which support is provided. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In such a configuration, the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are configured to be opened for a short time and then opened for a long time based on the start of support. As a result, the player can grasp the support target this time by confirming that the opening has been performed for a short time. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the second electric service winning opening 42 and the third electric service winning opening 43.

In particular, the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is terminated based on the combined time of the short-time opening and the long-time opening being the upper limit opening time. In this case, since the opening for the separate notification is a short-time opening, a long opening time can be secured. As a result, it is possible to preferably perform the separate notification by the electric accessory while securing the profit of the player.

In addition, the privilege given to the player is larger when the support lottery result using the first electric service counter C1 is out of order. Specifically, when the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is performed, the support of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning variation display is supported by the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a. The configuration is such that the support is given priority over the support, and the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is supported during the out-of-variation display of the first unit area 71. The support of the second electric accessory 42a or the support of the third electric accessory 43a has a greater privilege to be given to the player than the support of the first electric accessory 41a. As a result, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game.

In particular, since the deviation variation display time of the first unit area 71 is the advantageous time and the advantageous state ends when the advantageous time elapses, the player can perform the second electric combination within the advantageous time. The support of the object 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is to be generated more times. As a result, it is possible to inspire the player's gambling spirit and increase the digestibility of the game.

Further, the deviation fluctuation display time (advantageous time) of the first unit area 71 is configured to fluctuate. As a result, the number of times the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are supported fluctuates in the first unit area 71, so that the player can display the deviation variation of the first unit area 71 this time. It is assumed that attention will be paid to the out-of-range fluctuation display time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71.

In particular, the display screen G is configured to perform a countdown display of the deviation fluctuation display time. As a result, the player can easily grasp the remaining advantageous time.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the game board, the configuration related to the lottery, and the fluctuation start processing are different. The differences will be described below. The detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, the game board 300 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 31. 31 (a) is a front view of the game board 300, FIG. 31 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 301, and FIG. 31 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device 302.

In the range defined as the game area in the game board 300, a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed by performing router processing as in the first embodiment. In each opening, a first variable winning device 301, a second variable winning device 302, an upper operating port 303 corresponding to the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, a second through gate 52 in the first embodiment, or a first A lower operating port 304, a variable display unit 305, a main display unit 306, and the like corresponding to the three through gates 53 are provided. A nail 307 is provided in the game area.

When a ball (winning) is generated in the first variable winning device 301, the second variable winning device 302, the upper operating port 303, and the lower operating port 304, the detection sensor (winning) is arranged on the back side of the game board 300. It is detected by (not shown), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the upper operating port 303 or when a ball enters the lower operating port 304, three prize balls are paid out and entered into the first variable winning device 301. When a ball is generated or when a ball is entered into the second variable winning device 302, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the number of prize balls related to the lower operating port 304 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the upper operating port 303, and the number of prize balls of both operating ports 303 and 304 is large. It may be different. Further, for example, the number of prize balls related to the second variable winning device 302 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the first variable winning device 301, or the number of prize balls related to the second variable winning device 302 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the second variable winning device 302. The number of prize balls of both variable winning devices 301 and 302 may be different, such as a large number of prize balls according to the above.

Both the upper actuating port 303 and the lower actuating port 304 are opened upward. Both operating ports 303 and 304 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operating port 303 faces upward. The operating ports 303 and 304 are located in the center of the game area and below the variable display unit 305. Then, a guide nail 307a for guiding the game ball toward the respective operating ports 303 and 304 by colliding with the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 is provided. In this case, the degree of expectation of winning a prize in each of the operating ports 303 and 304 does not differ depending on the arrival position of the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 in the upper part of the game area. That is, it is not possible to aim and shoot the game ball so that the winning of one operating port occurs more frequently than the winning of the other operating port.

Here, the variable display unit 305 is provided with a center frame 305a, and the center frame 305a is provided with a stage 305b in which a guide passage 305c is formed. Both operating ports 303 and 304 are arranged below the exit portion of the guide passage 305c. That is, from the upper side to the lower side (toward the flow direction of the game ball), the outlet portion of the guide passage 305c, the upper working port 303, and the lower working port 304 are arranged in this order. As a result, the game ball derived from the outlet portion of the guide passage 305c can easily enter the upper operating port 303. Due to the guide passage 305c, the frequency of winning the upper operating port 303 is higher than the frequency of winning the lower operating port 304.

The main display unit 306 includes a first result display unit 306a for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 303, and the inside performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 304. A second result display unit 306b for clearly indicating the lottery result is set. In addition to the above-mentioned result display units 306a and 306b on the main display unit 306, when the open / close execution mode corresponding to the round game is set (or the open / close execution mode is set), the round game in the open / close execution mode is displayed. A round display unit for clearly indicating the number of times may be provided.

In the first result display unit 306a, the variation display of the specific symbol (specific symbol) is performed by triggering the winning of the upper operating port 303, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the line is performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 303. The result of the internal lottery is clearly shown by the display. If the internal lottery result based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 is the result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the specific stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 306a and the variation display is stopped. After that, the mode shifts to the first opening / closing execution mode.

In the second result display unit 306b, the variation display of the pattern (specific symbol) is performed by triggering the winning of the lower operating port 304, and as a result of stopping the variation display, it is performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 304. The result of the internal lottery is clearly indicated by the display. If the internal lottery result based on the winning of the lower operating port 304 is the result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the specific stop result is displayed on the second result display unit 306b and the variation display is stopped. After that, the mode shifts to the second open / close execution mode.

The main display unit 306 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as CRT and dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 306, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a plurality of patterns are displayed. It is conceivable that the seed colors are switched and displayed.

It should be noted that, based on the winning of the upper operating port 303, the variation display is started on the main display unit 306 and the symbol display device 81, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the game times 1 until the variation display is stopped. Corresponds to times.

In the lower left area on the front side of the center frame 305a, a first holding lamp unit 311 corresponding to the first result display unit 306a is provided. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 303 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first holding lamp unit 311. Further, on the lower right side of the front side of the center frame 305a, a second holding lamp unit 312 corresponding to the second result display unit 306b is provided. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 304 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second holding lamp unit 312.

As shown in FIG. 31B, the first variable winning device 301 provided above the variable display unit 305 (that is, above the display screen G of the symbol display device 81) is on the back side of the game board 300. It is provided with a first large winning opening 301a leading to the above, and is provided with a first opening / closing door 301b for opening and closing the first large winning opening 301a.

The first opening / closing door 301b is connected to the first variable winning drive unit 301c integrally provided as the first variable winning device 301 (the connection location is not shown). The first variable winning drive unit 301c is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and the first open / close door 301b is opened in a closed state (closed state) and an open state based on a drive signal from the main control device 101. Place it in one of the (open state). Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that the game ball cannot be won, and the game ball can be won when the transition to the first opening / closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 303. It can be switched to the open state.

Further, in the first variable winning device 301, the first passing portion 301d is formed at a position where the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 301 always passes through the first large winning opening 301a. The winning detection sensor 301e is provided so that the detection unit exists at the position of the first passing unit 301d. The winning detection sensor 301e individually detects the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 301. The winning detection sensor 301e is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and the detection result of the winning detection sensor 301e is output to the main control device 101.

As shown in FIG. 31 (c), the second variable winning device 302 provided below the variable display unit 305 (that is, below the display screen G of the symbol display device 81) is on the back side of the game board 300. It is provided with a second large winning opening 302a leading to the above, and is also provided with a second opening / closing door 302b for opening and closing the second large winning opening 302a.

The second opening / closing door 302b is connected to the second variable winning drive unit 302c integrally provided as the second variable winning device 302 (the connection location is not shown). The second variable winning drive unit 302c is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and the second open / close door 302b is set to either the closed state or the open state based on the drive signal from the main control device 101. Place it. Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that the game ball cannot be won, and the game ball can be won when the transition to the second opening / closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower operating port 304. It can be switched to the open state. That is, the variable winning device in which the opening / closing operation is performed differs between the first opening / closing execution mode and the second opening / closing execution mode.

Further, in the second variable winning device 302, a second passing portion 302d is formed at a position where a game ball that has won a prize in the second variable winning device 302 always passes through the second large winning opening 302a. The winning detection sensor 302e is provided so that the detection unit exists at the position of the second passing unit 302d. The winning detection sensor 302e individually detects the game balls that have won the second variable winning device 302. The winning detection sensor 302e is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and the detection result of the winning detection sensor 302e is output to the main control device 101.

Here, it is configured so that a prize is not generated in the first variable winning device 301. Specifically, in the game area, a plurality of regulation nails 307b for restricting the winning of the first variable winning device 301 are provided. The regulation nail 307b is provided so as to cover the first large winning opening 301a from the original side in the flow direction of the game ball, specifically from above, and the distance between the adjacent regulation nails 307b is the diameter of the game ball. Is set smaller than. As a result, even if the first opening / closing door 301b is opened, no prize is generated in the first large winning opening 301a.

<About the configuration of various counters>
Next, various counters used in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 32.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot generation lottery, the display of the main display unit 306, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the jackpot used for the jackpot generation lottery. Random number counter C11, jackpot type counter C12 used to determine jackpot type such as multi-round result or small round result with different number of rounds, and random number initial value counter CINI used to set initial value of jackpot random number counter C11. And the variation type counter CS that determines the deviation variation display time of the main display unit 306 are used.

Each of the counters C11, C12, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 230. The RAM 204 is provided with a hold ball storage area 321 including a first hold area Ra, a second hold area Rb, a first execution area AE1, and a second execution area AE2. Then, in the reserved ball storage area 321, the values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 are stored in time series according to the winning history of the game ball to the upper operating port 303 or the lower operating port 304. It has become like.

Each area will be described in detail. The first holding area Ra is a holding area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 in chronological order according to the winning history of the game ball to the upper operating port 303. The second hold area Rb is a hold area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 in chronological order according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower operating port 304.

The first reserved area Ra is composed of four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 and a first reserved number storage area RaN. With the four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4, up to four winning histories of game balls in the upper operating port 303 are reserved and stored. Specifically, when winning the upper operating port 303 occurs a plurality of times in succession, each numerical information is in chronological order in the order of 1st area Ra1 → 2nd area Ra2 → 3rd area Ra3 → 4th area Ra4. It will be stored in.

The first reserved number storage area RaN is a storage area for storing the number of used areas, that is, the number of game balls that have been won and reserved in the upper operating port 303. Specifically, any numerical value from 0 to 4 is stored in the first reserved number storage area RaN, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the upper operating port 303 is reserved and stored. Know how many you have.

The first execution area AE1 is an area for moving each value stored in the storage area of the first hold area Ra when starting the variable display of the first result display unit 306a of the main display unit 306. At the start of the variation display of the first result display unit 306a, a hit / fail determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the first execution area AE1.

The second reserved area Rb is composed of four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 and a second reserved number storage area RbN. Since these configurations are the same as those of the first hold area Ra and the first hold number storage area RaN, the description thereof will be omitted.

The second execution area AE2 is an area for moving each value stored in the storage area of the second hold area Rb when starting the variable display of the second result display unit 306b of the main display unit 306. At the start of the variation display of the second result display unit 306b, a hit / fail determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C11 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C11 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C11. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C11, and is periodically updated (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C11 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 321 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 303 or the lower operating port 304. More specifically, it is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 303, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 304. ..

Here, the winning value corresponding to the jackpot winning is predetermined. Specifically, two values are set as outliers, and a numerical value excluding these outliers is set as a winning value. That is, the winning result of the jackpot lottery is 598/600. The value and number of outliers are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C12 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C12 is periodically updated and stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins the upper operating port 303, and the second holding area when the game ball wins the lower operating opening 304. It is stored in Rb.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the type of jackpot, a multi-round result and a small-round result in which the number of times the round game is performed are different are set, and the jackpot type counter C12 is assigned to one of the above-mentioned round results. Used for. In the round game, the variable winning devices 301 and 302 are opened and closed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Specifically, in the round game, (A) the opening time of each of the large winning openings 301a and 302a becomes a predetermined upper limit opening time (for example, 10 sec), or (B) to each of the large winning openings 301a and 302a. This is a game that continues until any one of the winning numbers reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 10 pieces).

Here, only a small round result is set for the jackpot type related to the transition to the second open / close execution mode, while a multi-round result and a small round result are set for the jackpot type related to the transition to the first open / close execution mode. And are set. When shifting to the first open / close execution mode, the jackpot type counter C12 is used to sort the result into either a multi-round result or a small-round result.

The distribution destination of the jackpot result with respect to the jackpot type counter C12 is stored in the ROM 203 as a distribution table. The distribution table is a table in which the value of the jackpot type counter C12 and the distribution destination are uniquely determined. Specifically, among the jackpot type counters C12, "0 to 28" corresponds to the small round result, and "29" corresponds to the multi round result. The distribution of this numerical value is arbitrary.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 101>
Next, various processes executed by the main control device 101 in the present embodiment will be described below.

The various processes in the present embodiment are basically the same as those in the first embodiment.

Specifically, when a prize is detected in the upper operating port 303 by the timer interrupt processing, each value of the current jackpot random number counter C11 and jackpot type counter C12 is set in the empty area of the first hold area Ra. Store for the first area. Then, the hold command information is set based on the acquired jackpot random number counter C11.

On the other hand, when a prize is detected in the lower operating port 304, each value of the current jackpot random number counter C11 and jackpot type counter C12 is stored in the first free area of the second holding area Rb. To do.

Further, in the normal processing, the jackpot lottery and the variation display of the specific symbol in the result display units 306a and 306b of the main display unit 306 are independently based on the hold information stored in the reservation areas Ra and Rb. Let me do it. The jackpot lottery corresponds to the support lottery in the first embodiment, and the variable display of the specific symbols in the result display units 306a and 306b corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbols in each unit area 71 to 73 in the first embodiment. To do.

Further, when the jackpot lottery result of the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is the winning result, the stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the first result display unit 306a after the lapse of the variable display time. After ending the variable display, the mode shifts to the first open / close execution mode. In the first opening / closing execution mode, the round game is executed only once or a plurality of times. Specifically, when the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the first opening / closing execution mode is a small round result, the round game is executed only once. On the other hand, when the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the first opening / closing execution mode is a multi-round result, the round game is executed only three times over a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 sec). .. In the round game in the first opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing operation is executed for the first large winning opening 301a.

On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery result of the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is the winning result, the stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the second result display unit 306b after the lapse of the variable display time. After ending the variable display, the mode shifts to the second open / close execution mode. In the second open / close execution mode, the round game is executed only once. In the round game in the second opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing operation is executed for the second large winning opening 302a.

As already explained, it is not possible to win a game ball in the first prize opening 301a regardless of the opening / closing mode of the first prize opening 301a, while the game ball in the open second prize opening 302a. Winning is allowed. Therefore, in the first opening / closing execution mode, it is difficult to give the privilege to the player, while in the second opening / closing execution mode, the privilege is easily given to the player. The first opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment, and the second opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment. Respond to support.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation display time related to the first result display unit 306a is measured based on the fact that the second open / close execution mode is performed (the winning variation display ends on the second result display unit 306b). Is paused, and based on the end of the second open / close execution mode, the measurement of the fluctuation display time is restarted from the paused state.

On the other hand, based on the fact that the first open / close execution mode is performed (the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a ends), the variation display of the specific symbol on the second result display unit 306b and the trigger of the variation display are triggered. It is configured so that the jackpot lottery result is reset and the new variable display of the specific symbol is not started until the first opening / closing execution mode is completed.

With these configurations, the game playability shown in the first embodiment can be realized.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the winning order for the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 304 is random. Even in this case, the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 precedes the deviation variation display of the second result display unit 306b based on the winning of the lower operating port 304. It is configured to be easy to finish. The specific configuration will be described below.

<First special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the first special figure fluctuation start process executed in the first special figure correspondence process related to the display control of the first result display unit 306a will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33 (a). The first special figure correspondence process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14), and the first special figure variation start process is specified by the first result display unit 306a in the first special figure correspondence process. It is executed when it is specified to start the variable display of the symbol. Specifically, the first special figure fluctuation start process is not in each open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the fluctuation of the specific symbol, and the first result display unit 306a displays the deviation result. It is executed when it is not inside and the hold information is stored in the first hold area Ra (RaN> 0).

First, in step S1701, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the first reserved number storage area RaN is executed.

After that, in step S1702, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first holding area Ra for variable display is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first reserved area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1.

Then, the data stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 of the first reserved area Ra is shifted. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted to a lower area such as 2nd area Ra2 → 1st area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4 → 3rd area Ra3.

In the following step S1703, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C11 stored in the first execution area AE1 matches a predetermined outlier.

In step S1704, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in step S1703 is a jackpot winning. If the jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution determination is executed in step S1705. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C12 is grasped from the information stored in the first execution area AE1. Then, by referring to the distribution table, the jackpot result corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C12 acquired this time is grasped. Specifically, it is necessary to grasp which of the multi-round result and the small-round result was won.

In the following step S1706, a process of setting the winning variation display time of the first result display unit 306a is executed. Specifically, a predetermined fixed time (0.5 sec) is set as the winning variation display time of the first result display unit 306a. Specifically, "125" is set in the first fluctuation display time counter Tx provided in various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204. The first variation display time counter Tx is updated so as to be decremented by 1 when the first result display unit 306a is in the variation display and is not in the second open / close execution mode in the first special figure correspondence process. As described above, the first special figure correspondence process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14), so that the first variation display time counter Tx displays the variation on the first result display unit 306a. In the situation where The MPU 202 grasps that the variation display time has elapsed based on the fact that the first variation display time counter Tx becomes “0”, and executes a process of ending the variation display on the first result display unit 306a.

After that, in step S1707, the winning variation command is set, and the process proceeds to step S1710.

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won, the deviation variation display time of the first result display unit 306a is determined in step S1708. Specifically, the deviation variation display time is grasped by acquiring the current variation type counter CS and referring to the first table TD1 described in the first embodiment.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 33B, the first table TD1 is a table in which the numerical range of the variation type counter CS and the deviation variation display time are associated with each other. Similar to the first embodiment, the first table TD1 is set with different deviation variation display times according to the value of the variation type counter CS. In step S1708, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS acquired by referring to the first table TD1 is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to the grasped fluctuation display time is set to the first fluctuation display time counter Tx. And set.

After that, in step S1709, an deviation variation command including information for specifying the deviation variation display time is set, and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, the first result display unit 306a starts the variable display of the specific symbol. Then, the first special figure fluctuation start processing is completed.

<2nd special figure fluctuation start processing>
Next, the second special figure variation start process executed in the second special figure correspondence process related to the display control of the second result display unit 306b will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34 (a). The second special figure correspondence process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14) after the execution of the first special figure correspondence process, and the second special figure variation start process is in the above second special figure correspondence process. This is executed when the second result display unit 306b specifies that the variable display of the specific symbol is to be started. Specifically, the second special figure fluctuation start process is not in each open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 306b is not displaying the fluctuation of the specific symbol, and the first result display unit 306a displays the deviation result. It is executed when it is not inside and the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb (RbN> 0).

First, in step S1801, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the second reserved number storage area RbN is executed.

After that, in step S1802, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the second holding area Rb for variable display is executed. Since the data setting process is the same as the data setting process of the first special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 33), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C11 stored in the second execution area AE2 matches a predetermined outlier.

In the following step S1804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in step S1803 is a jackpot winning. If the jackpot is won, the process of determining the fluctuation display time of the second result display unit 306b is executed in steps S1805 to S1807.

Here, the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b is set to be different depending on the mode of the first result display unit 306a. Specifically, the variation display time set in the first result display unit 306a when the deviation is being displayed is set to be shorter than in the case where it is not.

Specifically, first, in step S1805, it is determined whether or not the first result display unit 306a is displaying the deviation variation. If the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the deviation, the process proceeds to step S1806, and the normal fluctuation display time determination process is executed. In this process, the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by referring to the normal table TD11 stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is grasped.

The normal table TD11 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34 (b-1). The normal table TD11 is a table in which the numerical range of the variation type counter CS and the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b are associated with each other. On the normal table TD11, the variation display time is sufficiently longer than the winning variation display time (0.5 sec) of the first result display unit 306a and is the minimum deviation display time (30 sec) of the first result display unit 306a. ) Is set for multiple types of time. Specifically, 3.0, 5.0, and 7.0 sec are set in the normal table TD11. In step S1806, by referring to the normal table TD11, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is grasped from each of the above fluctuation display times, and the numerical value corresponding to the grasped fluctuation display time is set to RAM 204. It is set for the second fluctuation display time counter Ty provided in various counter areas 235 of the above.

The second variation display time counter Ty is updated so that it is subtracted by 1 when the second result display unit 306b is displaying the variation in the second special figure correspondence process. As described above, the second special figure correspondence process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14), so that the second variation display time counter Ty displays the variation on the second result display unit 306b. Is performed, it is subtracted by 1 at a cycle of 4 msec, which is the execution cycle of normal processing. The MPU 202 grasps that the variation display time has elapsed based on the fact that the second variation display time counter Ty becomes “0”, and executes a process of ending the variation display on the second result display unit 306b.

On the other hand, if the first result display unit 306a is displaying the deviation variation, the process proceeds to step S1807 to execute the time reduction display time determination process. In this process, the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by referring to the time saving table TD12 stored in the variation display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, the variation display time corresponding to the acquired variation type counter CS is grasped.

The time saving table TD12 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34 (b-2). The time saving table TD12 is a table in which the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation display time of the second result display unit 306b are associated with each other. In the time saving table TD12, a plurality of types of times shorter than the variable display time set in the normal table TD11 are set. Specifically, 0.7, 1.0, 1.3 sec is set in the time saving table TD12. In step S1807, by referring to the time saving table TD12, the time corresponding to the acquired fluctuation type counter CS among the above-mentioned fluctuation display times is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to the grasped fluctuation display time is the second fluctuation. Set for the display time counter Ty.

Here, since the variation display time set in the time saving table TD12 is set shorter than the variation display time set in the normal table TD11, the deviation display of the first result display unit 306a is being displayed. In some cases, the second result display unit 306b will perform a shorter variation display than in the normal case.

Regarding the variable display time, if the minimum variable display time that can be selected in the normal variable display time determination process is set longer than the maximum variable display time that can be selected in the time saving variable display time determination process, the specific variation display time is specified. The number of types of time and variable display time is arbitrary.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, the average fluctuation display time selected during the deviation display of the first result display unit 306a may be set shorter than the average fluctuation display time when it is not.

If the jackpot is not won, the negative determination in step S1804 is made, and the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, the deviation variation display time determination process is executed. The deviation display time determination process is the same as that of the normal variation display time determination process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a different variation display time may be set.

After executing the process of step S1806, step S1807 or step S1808, the second result display unit 306b starts the variation display of the specific symbol in step S1809 and ends the second special figure variation start process.

By the way, in the jackpot result based on the winning of the lower operating port 304, the jackpot type is not provided. Therefore, the configuration related to the distribution determination is omitted.

<About the flow of the game and the action of each of the above fluctuation start processes>
Next, the flow of the game of the present embodiment and the operation of each of the above fluctuation start processes will be described.

First, a jackpot lottery is performed based on winning a prize in the upper operating port 303 or the lower operating port 304, and the first result display unit 306a or the second result display unit 306b changes the specific symbol corresponding to the jackpot lottery result. The display starts. The above jackpot lottery is almost won. Then, when the variation display of the second result display unit 306b is performed at the end timing of the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a, the variation display and the jackpot lottery result related thereto are reset (erased). Reset. Then, the first open / close execution mode is started based on the end of the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a, and the variation display of the second result display unit 306b is not started until the end of the first open / close execution mode. After that, when the first open / close execution mode ends, the variable display of the second result display unit 306b is newly started on condition that the hold information exists in the second hold area Rb.

Here, the winning variation display time of the first result display unit 306a is set shorter than the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b. Therefore, the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a tends to end before the end timing of the variation display of the second result display unit 306b. Therefore, in a situation where the winning variation display is performed on the first result display unit 306a, the winning variation display ends without being reset on the second result display unit 306b, and the event of shifting to the second opening / closing execution mode is unlikely to occur. ..

In particular, as compared with the first embodiment, the fluctuation display time of the second result display unit 306b selected when the first result display unit 306a is not in the out-of-order fluctuation display is the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a. It is set sufficiently larger than the time. As a result, in the situation where the first result display unit 306a is not displayed as the deviation variation, the second result display unit 306b changes regardless of the randomness of the winning timing to the upper operation port 303 and the lower operation port 304. The winning display of the first result display unit 306a is likely to end during the display.

On the other hand, when the deviation variation display is performed on the first result display unit 306a, the deviation variation display time of the first result display unit 306a is set longer than the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b. The variation display of the second result display unit 306b is likely to end during the deviation variation display. Then, when the winning variation display of the second result display unit 306b is completed, the mode shifts to the second open / close execution mode, and the counting of the variation display time of the deviation variation display of the first result display unit 306a is temporarily stopped. Then, in the second opening / closing execution mode, a round game (opening / closing operation of the second large winning opening 302a) is performed, and the game ball wins the second large winning opening 302a. As a result, the player is given a privilege.

Then, at the end timing of the round game, if the first result display unit 306a is performing the deviation display, the variation display based on the new hold information may be performed after the second opening / closing execution mode is completed. .. In this case, if the variation display is the winning variation display, the second open / close execution mode is restarted based on the end of the winning variation display. As a result, the second open / close execution mode can be performed a plurality of times in a situation where the first result display unit 306a is disengaged and the variable display is being performed. That is, it can be said that the state in which the first result display unit 306a is displayed with the deviation variation is a state in which the second opening / closing execution mode is easily performed, which is an advantageous state for the player. The advantageous state includes at least the time during which the fluctuation display is performed on the second result display unit 306b until the count of the deviation display time of the first result display unit 306a becomes "0", and the second. 2 The time including the time when the hold information does not exist in the hold area Rb deviates and continues until the variable display time is reached.

Here, in a situation where the winning timings for the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 304 are random, the variation display of the second result display unit 306b is reset due to the end of the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a. In order to make it easier to perform, it is preferable to set the fluctuation display time of the second result display unit 306b as long as possible than the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a. However, if the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b is lengthened, the interval of shifting to the second opening / closing execution mode in the situation where the deviation display of the first result display unit 306a is being performed, that is, the second opening / closing execution of 1. Since the interval between the mode and the next second opening / closing execution mode becomes large, the smooth progress of the game is hindered, and there is a concern that the degree of attention to the game in the advantageous state may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the first result display unit 306a is in the process of displaying the deviation variation, the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b is set shorter than the normally selected variation display time. To. As a result, the interval between the second opening / closing execution modes is shortened, so that the game can proceed smoothly in the advantageous state.

<Production control processing and opening / closing execution command correspondence processing>
Next, the effect control process in the present embodiment will be described.

In the effect control process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not an open / close execution command has been received instead of the process of step S1303 of the effect control process (FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. The open / close execution command is a command set when shifting to the first open / close execution mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first game state transition process is executed between the first special figure correspondence process and the second special figure correspondence process in the normal process. In the first game state transition process, the process of shifting to the first open / close execution mode is executed based on the completion of the winning variation display on the first result display unit 306a, and the process related to the round game, specifically. Is a process related to opening / closing control of the first winning opening 301a. The open / close execution command is set in the process of shifting to the first open / close execution mode in the first game state transition process. In the open / close execution command, information for specifying the type of the jackpot result that triggered the first open / close execution mode is set.

Further, instead of the process of step S1304, the process corresponding to the open / close execution command is executed. The opening / closing execution command correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the processes of steps S1901 to S1905 are the same as the processes of steps S1502 to S1506 of the release command corresponding process (FIG. 27), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, different types of hold notice effects are set in correspondence with the setting of two jackpot results having different numbers of rounds, which is the number of round games performed in the first open / close execution mode. ing.

Specifically, in step S1906, the number of rounds in the first open / close execution mode this time is grasped. In detail, based on the information included in the open / close execution command received this time, the type of the jackpot result that triggered the first open / close execution mode this time is grasped. Then, the number of rounds corresponding to the type is grasped.

In the following step S1907, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds grasped in step S1906 is multiple rounds (3 rounds). If it is not a multi-round, the process proceeds to step S1908, the hold notice effect corresponding to the pass / fail information grasped in step S1905 is started, and the process corresponding to the main open / close execution command is completed.

On the other hand, in the case of multiple rounds, the process proceeds to step S1909, the reach hold notice effect corresponding to the hit / fail information grasped in step S1905 is started, and the process corresponding to the main opening / closing execution command is completed. In the reach hold notice effect, after the reach display is performed as a variable display mode of the decorative symbol, the stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the hit / fail information is performed.

Here, the reach display (reach state) is a variable display state in which the decorative symbol on the symbol display device 81 is likely to be in an advantageous state at a stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display. The display state to make you think.

In other words, there is a possibility that a combination of jackpot decorative symbols can be established by stopping and displaying some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 81. It is a display state in which a combination of reach decorative symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of the decorative symbol, a reach decoration in which a combination of jackpot decorative symbols may be established on a preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 81. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of decorative symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 8 will be described in detail. In the state where the variable display of the decorative symbol is first completed in the upper symbol row Z1 and then the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed in the lower symbol row Z3, either of them is effective. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. This will be the reach display. Then, when an advantageous state occurs, specifically, when the fluctuation display related to the reach display is off and the fluctuation display is, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is the reach line. The variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated so that the display is stopped at the top.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach decorative symbols is displayed as described above, the decorative symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. Includes those that perform a reach effect by means of, and those that display a reach by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or hiding the combination of reach decorative symbols. Is done.

According to such a configuration, when the hold information related to the next game round is acquired at the timing when the first open / close execution mode is started, the hold notice effect is executed for the hold information related to the next game round. Will be done. In this case, either the normal hold notice effect or the reach hold notice effect is selected as the hold notice effect, depending on the mode of the first opening / closing execution mode.

Here, in the case of a multi-round result with a large number of rounds, the time required to digest the first open / close execution mode is longer than in the case of a small round result. Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time for performing the hold notice effect, and it is possible to preferably perform the reach display. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the hold notice effect and increase the attention of the hold notice effect.

In the hold command corresponding process of the present embodiment, a process of grasping the remaining open / close execution mode time is executed instead of the remaining open time. Specifically, the MPU 202 of the main control device 101 sets the current round information and the remaining open time information (specifically, the numerical information of the timer counter) when setting the hold command. Then, when a hold command is received, these information are stored, and the remaining open / close execution mode time is grasped based on the information.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 304 are provided, and the first result display unit 306a and the second result display unit 306b independently perform variable display based on the winning of the respective operating ports 303 and 304. Then, when the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a is completed, the variation display of the second result display unit 306b is reset. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which the determination result of the winning / failing determination based on the winning of each of the operating ports 303 and 304 is related.

When the winning variation display of the second result display unit 306b is completed, the counting of the variation display time in the first result display unit 306a is temporarily stopped, and then the second open / close execution mode related to the winning variation display is set. The above count is restarted based on the end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first open / close execution mode and the second open / close execution mode from occurring at the same time while utilizing the pass / fail judgment result related to the change display that is the target of the pause and the change display time until the pause. be able to.

It is configured so that a prize may be generated in the upper operating port 303 when the game ball is launched aiming at the lower operating port 304. As a result, it is possible to preferentially generate a prize in the lower operating port 304 and suppress an act of favoring the game. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

That is, in order to prevent the winning variation display from being performed on the first result display unit 306a and to display the winning variation on the second result display unit 306b, it is possible to avoid winning the upper operating port 303. At the same time, it is conceivable to win a prize in the lower operating port 304. Specifically, it is conceivable to launch the game ball so that the winning of the lower operating port 304 is preferentially generated over the winning of the upper operating port 303. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative positional relationship between the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 304 is set so that the lower operating port 304 cannot be aimed only, and both of these operating ports 303 and 304 are set. A configuration is provided to guide the game ball toward. As a result, it is possible to prevent a difference in the benefits obtained depending on the skill of the player, and the fairness of the game is ensured.

The fluctuation display time of the second result display unit 306b is set in the situation where the first result display unit 306a is displaying the deviation variation, and the fluctuation display time is set to that in the situation where the first result display unit 306a is not performing the deviation fluctuation display. Was also set short. As a result, in a situation where the first result display unit 306a does not display the deviation variation, the first result display unit 306a displays the deviation variation while suppressing the occurrence frequency of the second open / close execution mode. The interval between the second open / close execution modes can be shortened in some situations. Therefore, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

In the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 301a and the second large winning opening 302a are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one large winning opening may be used. In this case, in the first opening / closing execution mode, it is preferable to set the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening so that the winning opening does not occur or the winning frequency is lower than that in the second opening / closing execution mode.

Further, for example, a movable accessory is provided at a position where the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening of 1 above is restricted and a position where the game ball is not restricted, and the accessory is set based on the first opening / closing execution mode. The accessory may be arranged at the restricted position, and the accessory may be arranged at the unregulated position based on the second opening / closing execution mode. The point is that the winning of the large winning opening is restricted in the situation of the first opening / closing execution mode, and the winning of the large winning opening is allowed in the situation of the second opening / closing execution mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time during which the first opening / closing execution mode is set is adjusted by changing the number of rounds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the upper limit opening time of the first large winning opening 301a is set. By making them different, the time during which the first opening / closing execution mode is set may be adjusted. However, when the upper limit opening time of the first large winning opening 301a per round game is set to a specific time (for example, 30 sec), the time in the first opening / closing execution mode is within the specified time. Will be. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by executing a plurality of round games, it is possible to secure a time equal to or longer than the specific time as the time in which the first open / close execution mode is set, and the hold notice effect is produced. Diversification can be achieved.

Further, the winning probability of the big hit lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 may be different from the winning probability of the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower operating port 304. In this case, by adjusting both, it is possible to adjust the frequency at which the first opening / closing execution mode is performed and the frequency at which the second opening / closing execution mode is performed, and it is possible to preferably manage the game.

Further, the winning probability of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the lower operating port 304 in the situation where the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the deviation and fluctuation is calculated from the winning probability in the situation where the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the fluctuation. May also be low. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second opening / closing execution mode from being executed in a situation where the first result display unit 306a is off and the variable display is not being performed, and it is possible to suppress the unintended granting of benefits.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the lower operating port 304 is different from that of the second embodiment. The differences will be described below.

The game board 400 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 400.

In the game area of the game board 400 of the present embodiment, an upper operating port 401 and a lower operating port 402 are provided, and a through gate 403 is provided. Further, in correspondence with the through gate 403, the decorative member 65 is provided with the accessory display unit 404, and the lower operating port 402 is provided with the electric accessory 402a.

When the game ball passes through the through gate 403, a support lottery is performed, and a variable display of a normal symbol is performed on the accessory display unit 404. Then, when the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result, the stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the accessory display unit 404, and then the electric accessory 402a is supported (opening / closing operation).

In the situation where the electric accessory 402a is closed, the game ball cannot be won in the lower operating port 304, while in the situation where the electric accessory 402a is open, the game ball can be won in the lower operating port 304. It is configured to be. Specifically, when the electric accessory 402a is in the closed state, the distance between the tip of the electric accessory 402a and the case body forming the upper operating port 303 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The relative positional relationship between the operating ports 401 and 402 is set. Then, when the electric accessory 402a is in the open state, the distance between the tip of the electric accessory 402a and the case body forming the upper operating port 303 is larger than the diameter of the game ball. The movable range of is set. As a result, the electric accessory 402a is changed from the closed state to the open state, so that the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 304 is allowed.

According to such a configuration, the winning frequency of the lower operating port 304 differs depending on whether or not the support of the electric accessory 402a is generated in the situation where the disengagement variation display of the first result display unit 306a is performed. Since the winning frequency affects the number of executions of the second opening / closing execution mode, it affects the privilege of the player. Therefore, in the second opening / closing execution mode, the degree of attention to the through gate 403, the electric accessory 402a, and the accessory display unit 404 can be increased.

In addition, in a situation where the electric accessory 402a is in the closed state, a game ball may be allowed to win a prize in the lower operating port 304. In short, it is sufficient that the winning frequency of the lower operating port 304 when the electric accessory 402a is in the open state is higher than that when the electric accessory 402a is in the closed state.

Further, the center frame 305a of the variable display unit 305 is provided with a third holding lamp unit 405 that shows the winning history of the through gate 403. The maximum number of game balls that have won the through gate 403 is four, and the number of the game balls is displayed by lighting the third hold lamp unit 405.

<About the configuration of various counters>
Next, various counters in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

In the present embodiment, unlike the second embodiment, the electric service counter C21 is provided as a counter for performing the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 403, and the electric service counter C21 for storing the electric service counter C21 is provided. A combination holding area 411 is provided. Since the electric service counter C21 and the electric service holding area 411 have the same configuration as the first electric service counter C1 and the first electric service holding area 231 of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 402a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, the electric accessory 402a of the lower operating port 402 is in the open state per unit time when compared in the situation where the game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area. A low-frequency support mode (or a low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (or a high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of occurrence is relatively high or low.

The probability of winning the support lottery using the electric service counter C21 is different between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the winning probability of the support lottery in the low frequency support mode is smaller than that in the high frequency support mode.

Further, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 402a is opened when the support is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the support lottery result is the winning result and the electric accessory 402a is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time.

Further, in the high frequency support mode, the support interval from the provision of a predetermined support to the next support is set shorter than that in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time of the normal symbol performed on the accessory display unit 404 is set shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

From the above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 402 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. Then, when a prize is generated in the lower operating port 402, the second opening / closing execution mode can be entered. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player is likely to be given a privilege.

<Processing for electrical support>
The electric service support process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. The electric service support process is independent of the normal process (FIG. 14), which is related to the variable display of specific symbols on both result display units 306a and 306b based on the winning of the game balls to both operating ports 401 and 402. Is executed. In the electric service support process, the variable display of the normal symbol on the accessory display unit 404 and the opening / closing operation control of the electric accessory 402a are performed.

First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 402a is being supported. If the electric accessory 402a is not being supported, the process proceeds to step S2002, and the accessory display unit 404 determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

If the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S2003, and it is determined whether or not there is hold information (electric service counter C21) in the electric service hold area 411 that has not yet been the target of the support lottery.

If there is no hold information that has not yet been selected for the support lottery, the main electric service support process is terminated as it is, while if the above hold information exists, the process proceeds to step S2004 and the first result is displayed. It is determined whether or not the unit 306a is out of alignment and the variation is being displayed.

If the first result display unit 306a is out of alignment and the fluctuation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S2005, the fluctuation start processing of the normal symbol corresponding to the low frequency support mode is executed, and the processing for main electric service support is terminated. Specifically, the support lottery is performed using the hold information, and the process of determining the variable display time of the normal symbol is executed. Then, the variable display of the normal symbol is started.

On the other hand, if the first result display unit 306a is out of alignment and the fluctuation is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S2006, the fluctuation start processing of the normal symbol corresponding to the high frequency support mode is executed, and the processing for main electric service support is completed. To do. Specifically, the support lottery is performed so that the winning probability is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, and the variable display time shorter than the variable display time in the low frequency support mode is determined. Then, the variable display of the normal symbol is started. As a result, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened.

If the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being displayed (step S2002: YES), the fluctuation processing is executed in step S2007. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed, a process of displaying the stop result corresponding to the support lottery result is executed. Then, when the support lottery result is a winning result, a flag for identifying that the support is being supported is set.

If it is being supported, affirmative determination is made in step S2001, and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the first result display unit 306a is off and the variation display is in progress.

If the first result display unit 306a is disengaged and the fluctuation display is not in progress, in step S2009, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 402a corresponding to the low frequency support mode is executed, and the main electric role support process is terminated. Specifically, a process for opening the electric accessory 402a only once for 0.2 sec is executed.

On the other hand, when the first result display unit 306a is disengaged and variable display is being performed, in step S2010, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 402a corresponding to the high frequency support mode is executed to perform the main electric role support process. finish. Specifically, the operation of opening the electric accessory 402a for a time longer than the opening time (for example, 0.4 sec) in the low frequency support mode is set as a unit operation via a predetermined interval time (for example, 0.2 sec). The process for performing the unit operation a plurality of times (for example, three times) is executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in the situation where the first result display unit 306a is performing the deviation variation display, the high frequency support mode is set, and the first result display unit 306a displays the deviation variation. Low frequency support mode in situations where it is not performed, specifically, in situations where variation display is not performed on the first result display unit 306a and situations where winning variation display is performed on the first result display unit 306a. It was set. As a result, it becomes difficult for the lower operating port 304 to win a prize in the situation where the first result display unit 306a does not display the deviation and the variation, so that the second opening / closing execution mode is difficult to be executed in the situation. On the other hand, in a situation where the first result display unit 306a is displaying the deviation and fluctuation, the lower operating port 304 is likely to win a prize, so that the execution frequency of the second opening / closing execution mode can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the support lottery in the high frequency support mode is set higher than that in the low frequency support mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, even if the winning probability of the support lottery is set to be the same. Good. In addition, in a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times for ordinary symbols are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a shorter variable display time is easier to select or the average variable display time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. May be done. In short, the probability of winning the support lottery, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol, and the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 402a so that the high-frequency support mode wins more frequently in the lower operating port 402 than the low-frequency support mode. At least one of the aspects may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b may be set shorter than the winning variation display time of the first result display unit 306a. Even in this case, if the first result display unit 306a is disengaged and the fluctuation display is not performed, the electric accessory 402a regulates the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 402, so that the second opening / closing execution mode Is unlikely to occur.

Further, for example, the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 401 may be synchronized with the support of the electric accessory 402a. Specifically, when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 401 in a situation where the winning variation display of the normal symbol is being displayed on the accessory display unit 404, the winning variation display of the normal symbol is immediately displayed based on the winning. It is configured to end and start the support of the electric accessory 402a. As a result, the frequency of winning the lower operating port 402 after the winning of the upper operating port 401 tends to increase.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. By the way, the following configurations of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In the first embodiment, after the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71, the deviation result is displayed for a predetermined time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first unit region 71 is at the end timing of the deviation variation display. 1 When the hold information is stored in the electric service hold area 231, the next variable display based on the hold information may be started immediately. In this case, even if the next variation display is the winning variation display, the winning variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 may end during the winning variation display. That is, it can be said that it is in an advantageous state even during the next fluctuation display after the deviation fluctuation display. Then, when the next variation display is the winning variation display, the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 ends based on the end of the winning variation display, and the advantageous state ends. To do.

According to the above configuration, the out-of-variation display (out-of-game times) and the next variation display (next game times) are digested as a series of advantageous states. For example, when the deviation variation display is continuously performed, each of these deviation variation displays and the winning variation display after the deviation variation display are digested as a series of advantageous states. As a result, the fluctuation display before and after can be closely related, and the smooth progress of the game can be achieved because it is not necessary to secure the display time of the deviation result.

In this case, in the display of the remaining advantageous time, for example, the remaining time of the deviation variation display is displayed based on the start of the deviation variation display. Then, the deviation variation display time is counted, and when the counting ends (when the remaining time becomes "0"), it is determined whether or not the hold command information exists. If the pending command information does not exist, the ending is executed, while if the pending command information exists, it waits for the variable command to be received. Based on the fact that the variable command is received, the remaining advantageous time is reset and the count is restarted. The remaining advantageous time is set to 0.5 sec when the winning variation command is received, and is set to the deviation variation display time when the deviation variation command is received. As a result, it is possible to make it appear that the remaining advantageous time has been extended, so that it is possible to further improve the degree of attention to the game.

In the above configuration, the ending of 2 sec is executed after the end of the winning game round after the out-of-game round. Then, when the hold command information is set in the hold command information storage area 261, a time saving hold notice effect is set for the hold command information after the ending is completed. As a result, during the opening of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning variation display that triggered the end of the advantageous state, the ending and the hold notice effect related to the next game round can be performed.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(2) In the first embodiment, the variable type counter CS at that time was not acquired based on the winning of the first through gate 51, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, based on each of the above winnings, the time point The variable type counter CS in the above may be acquired. In this case, the variable type counter CS is configured to be stored in the first electric service holding area 231 together with the first electric service counter C1, and the first electric service counter C1 acquired this time is removed in the confirmation process for the hold notice. When it corresponds to the value, the outlier variation display time may be determined by using the acquired variation type counter CS. In this case, the disconnection hold command including the deviation fluctuation display time is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102. As a result, the voice emission control device 102 has acquired the first electric service counter C1 corresponding to the disconnection based on the reception of the hold command, and the disengagement fluctuation display time based on the first electric service counter C1 ( It is possible to grasp the off-game time).

In such a configuration, for example, when the first electric service counter C1 having the same outlier value is continuously acquired, both of them may be treated as one game time in a pseudo manner. Specifically, for example, the hold information (first electric service counter C1) related to the next game round is acquired at a timing before the timing when the predetermined outlier game round is started, and the hold information is obtained. If it is the same as the outlier value, the next outlier game round is started immediately after the end of the predetermined outlier game round.

In this case, the voice emission control device 102 determines whether or not the next game time is an out-of-game time in the process related to the start of the effect during the advantageous state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold command information related to the next game round is acquired and the hold command information corresponds to the deviation. Then, when it is confirmed that the next game time is the out-of-game time, the out-of-game time of the next game time is grasped, and the out-of-game time of the current out-of-game time and the next out-of-game time The total time including the out-of-game times is displayed on the display screen G, and the countdown is started. As a result, it is possible to make it appear that one game round with a long advantageous time is being performed in a pseudo manner.

Further, when the first electric service counter C1 which is related to the next game round and whose value is the same as the outlier value is acquired in the situation where the predetermined outlier game round is performed, the above predetermined Immediately after the end of the outlier game round, the next outlier game round is started. Then, in the voice emission control device 102, in the hold command correspondence process, it is determined whether the hold command received this time is related to the next game time and the next game time is out of the game time, and at the present time. It is determined whether or not the effect is being executed during the advantageous state. Then, when the above two determinations are affirmed, the off-game round time corresponding to the hold command acquired this time is added to the current remaining advantageous time to perform a countdown. As a result, it is possible to make it appear that the advantageous time has increased in the middle, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the advantageous state.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(3) In the first embodiment, two second through gates 52 and a third through gate 53 are provided, and corresponding to these, a second electric service winning opening 42, a second electric accessory 42a, and a third electric power are provided. The winning combination 43 and the third electric accessory 43a are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a through gate of 1 and an electric winning combination and an electric accessory may be provided. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of attention to the flow mode of the game ball, it is preferable to provide two of each.

Further, for example, a configuration may be configured in which a plurality of electric service winning openings are associated with one through gate. In this case, if the support lottery result based on the winning of 1 through gate is the winning result, one of the plurality of electric service winning openings is selected by the internal lottery, and the selected electric service is selected. The electric accessory provided in the winning opening may be opened and closed.

In this case, since it is not possible to visually determine which electric accessory is to be opened / closed before the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory is performed, attention can be paid to the operation mode of the electric accessory. .. As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the separate notification by the electric accessory.

(4) In the first embodiment, the electric service winning openings 41 to 43 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only one electric service winning port and the electric accessory may be provided. In this case, it is based on the support lottery triggered by the winning of the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53, rather than the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory based on the support lottery triggered by the winning of the first through gate 51. It is preferable to set the opening / closing operation mode of the electric accessory so that the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory has a higher expectation that the game ball will enter. As a result, the number of game balls paid out to the player in an advantageous state can be increased.

(5) In the first embodiment, the minimum fluctuation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is set longer than the winning fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. The minimum variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be set to be the same as the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71. Even in this case, the first normal figure fluctuation start process is executed before the second normal figure change start process and the third normal figure change start process in the same processing times of the normal process, and the first unit area 71 Since the process related to the end of the variable display in the first unit area 71 is executed before the process related to the end of the variable display in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, the variable display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 ends first. Will be done.

Further, the distance between the first through gate 51 and the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 is set so that the distance for the game ball to fall is 4 msec or more, not limited to the configuration in which the processing order is set as described above. It may be configured to be set.

(6) In the first embodiment, the support lottery result based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is an advantageous state when the result is out of order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first through gate 51 When the support lottery result based on the winning result is the winning result, the player may be in an advantageous state. For example, the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71 is set longer than the variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, and the deviation variation display time of the first unit area 71 is set to the second unit area 72. And set shorter than the fluctuation display time of the third unit area 73. Then, the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is reset based on the end of the winning variation display or the loss variation display in the first unit area 71. In this case, the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 (during the winning game rotation) is in an advantageous state for the player.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(7) In the first embodiment, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started during the display of the deviation change of the first unit area 71, the deviation change of the first unit area 71 Although the display time count is paused, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display time count may not be paused. In this case, since the advantageous time can be treated as a fixed time, it is possible to facilitate the management of the game and simplify the processing configuration.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(8) In the first embodiment, the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is reset based on the end of the winning game round, but the configuration is not limited to this and is not reset. May be good. In this case, if the support mode (opening / closing operation mode) of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a during the winning game is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than that during the off-game. Good. As a result, even if the support of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is started during the winning game due to not resetting, the privilege given to the player is given. It can be reduced and the advantageous state can be guaranteed.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(9) In the first embodiment, the other variation display may be reset based on the end of the winning variation display of one of the variation displays of each unit area 71 to 73. In this case, a lottery is separately performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and when the shift to the advantageous state is performed, the variable display time of the first unit area 71 is set to the second unit area 72 and It is preferable that the configuration is set to be longer than the variable display time of the third unit area 73. As a result, the player is in an advantageous state until the plurality of game times are digested.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the hold notice effect and the time-saving hold notice effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only the hold notice effect may be executed. However, paying attention to increasing the execution frequency of the effect, it is preferable to execute both the hold notice effect and the time-saving hold notice effect.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the normal hold notice effect (and the time saving normal hold notice effect) is configured to be performed across the opening or opening / closing execution mode of the first electric accessory 41a and the next game round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be performed only during the opening or the first opening / closing execution mode of the first electric accessory 41a. In this case, since the difference in production time between the normal hold notice effect and the advantageous hold notice effect is unlikely to occur, the result of the next game round is specified at a timing before the stop result is displayed on the display screen G. Inconvenience can be avoided.

In addition, paying attention to the point of diversifying the normal hold notice effect, it is preferable to execute the configuration during the next game round.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous hold notice effect is configured to be performed only during the opening or opening / closing execution mode of the first electric accessory 41a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first electric accessory 41a It may be configured to be performed across the opening or first opening / closing execution mode and the subsequent off-game rounds. In this case, the winning variation display time is secured as the production time of the advantageous hold notice effect after the off-game round is started. Then, it is preferable that the effect during the advantageous state is executed based on the completion of the advantageous hold notice effect.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the effect related to the game times (holding notice effect) is executed by utilizing the support of the first electric accessory 41a on the front side and the time during which the game times are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect related to the game round may be executed by using the support of the first electric accessory 41a on the rear side for the game round. That is, the effect related to the winning game may be executed across the winning game and the support of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning game. In this case, the player is informed of the stop result of the first unit area 71 and the opening / closing operation mode of the first electric accessory 41a so that the result of the current game round is not grasped at a timing earlier than the end timing of the above effect. It should be difficult to understand.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the time between the winning game times and the next game times (support time of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment, first opening / closing execution in the second and third embodiments). The mode time) was a fixed time, but the time is not limited to this and may be set as a variable time. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, a configuration may be configured in which a prize is allowed in the first electric service winning opening 41. As a result, the support time varies depending on the winning mode of the first electric service winning opening 41.

In such a configuration, it is preferable to change the production mode of the hold notice effect according to the time between the winning game times and the next game times. Specifically, in the normal hold notice effect and the time saving normal hold notice effect, it is preferable to temporarily display the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols based on the start of the next game round.

In the advantageous hold notice effect and the time saving advantageous hold notice effect, it is preferable to stop and display the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols based on the start of the next game round.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining advantageous time is displayed on the display screen G, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may not be displayed. In this case, the player will digest the game in the advantageous state while predicting when the advantageous state will end.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous time (the deviation display time of the first unit region 71) is changed, but it may not be changed. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the management of the game and simplify the processing configuration. However, if we focus on increasing the degree of attention to the game, the variable configuration is superior.

(17) In the first embodiment, the opening / closing mode is set to be the same for the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a, but the opening / closing mode is not limited to this, for example, the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 42a. The opening / closing mode may be set differently from that of the electric accessory 43a. In this case, it is advisable to set the opening / closing mode of both so that the degree of expectation that the game ball enters is different. As a result, the player pays attention to which of the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 passes through, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased. Can be improved.

Further, the probability of winning the support lottery based on the winning of the second through gate 52 and the probability of winning the support lottery based on the winning of the third through gate 53 may be different from each other. Even in this case, there is a difference in the privilege given to the player depending on whether the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the flow mode of the game ball.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, when the deviation display of the first unit area 71 or the first result display unit 306a is completed, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, or the second result display unit Although the configuration is such that the fluctuation display of 306b is continued, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration for resetting may be used. In this case, since the fluctuation range of the advantageous time can be reduced, the game can be easily managed and the processing related to the end of the advantageous state can be simplified.

(19) In the first embodiment, "0" is displayed as a count display of the remaining advantageous time based on the end of the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71. The configuration is not limited, and the count display of the remaining advantageous time may be continued until, for example, the advantageous state ends. Specifically, at the end timing of the deviation variation display (for example, after the display of the deviation result is executed in the first unit area 71), is the winning variation display being displayed in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73? Judge whether or not. When the winning variation is being displayed, the remaining variation display time is grasped based on the second timer counter T2 or the third timer counter T3. If both are displaying the winning fluctuations, the longer remaining fluctuation display time is grasped. Then, a command including the remaining fluctuation display time information is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the voice emission control device 102. The display control device 212 displays the remaining fluctuation display time based on the reception of the command.

Further, the end condition of the opening / closing operation may be displayed based on the elapse of the remaining fluctuation display time. Specifically, 6 sec is displayed as the upper limit opening time, and 10 is displayed as the upper limit number. Then, the upper limit opening time is counted and the upper limit number is counted. As a result, the timing at which the advantageous state ends can be easily grasped.

(20) According to the first embodiment, both the fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 and the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a are performed in the situation where the hold information is not acquired in the first electric service holding area 231. If the first electric service counter C1 is acquired in a situation where the above is not performed, the deviation fluctuation display is immediately performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is predetermined between the acquisition timing and the start timing of the deviation fluctuation display. A time may be provided and the opening effect may be executed at the predetermined time.

(21) In the first embodiment, a lottery is performed based on the winning of the first through gate 51 to determine whether or not to generate the support of the first electric accessory 41a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to emit a specific lamp provided in the game area. That is, the target of the lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is arbitrary.

Further, the first electric accessory 41a may not be provided. In this case, if the lottery result based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is the winning result, the winning result is displayed for a predetermined time, and during the winning result display, the second unit area 72 and The fluctuation display of the third unit area 73 is prevented from starting. As a result, the same game as in the first embodiment can be performed.

(22) In the first embodiment, the event that the game ball wins the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is unlikely to occur without passing through the first through gate 51. The configuration is not limited to the above, and for example, the above-mentioned event may easily occur. In this case, the positional relationship of the through gates 51 to 53 and the position of the nail that guides the game ball are set so that the winning frequency to the through gates 51 to 53 does not change regardless of the launch mode of the game ball. It is good. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming so that the winning of the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is prioritized over the winning of the first through gate 51, and the fairness of the game is ensured. can do.

(23) In the first embodiment, based on the start of support for the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a, the variation display time is counted in both the winning variation display and the losing variation display of the first unit area 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be paused only in the case of the out-of-order variable display, and may not be paused in the case of the winning variable display. In this case, it is preferable that the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is terminated based on the end of the winning variation display (start of the support of the first electric accessory 41a).

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the winning probability of the support lottery using the first electric service counter C1 or the winning / failing determination using the jackpot random number counter C11 is relatively high or low are set. It may be configured to be used. In this case, it can be said that the low probability mode is advantageous for the player because the deviation variation display is more likely to be performed in the first unit area 71 or the first result display unit 306a.

(25) In the first embodiment, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a may be varied. In this case, when the first electric accessory 41a is opened for a long time, the reach display described in the second embodiment may be performed.

Further, the opening / closing operation mode of the first electric accessory 41a may be configured such that the first electric accessory 41a is opened twice with an interval time during which the first electric accessory 41a is closed, and the interval time may be varied. As a result, it is possible to secure a time equal to or longer than the upper limit opening time as the production time of the hold notice effect.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous time is displayed in a countdown format, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous time may be displayed in a countdown format. In this case, it is advisable to display the current deviation variation display time separately so that the remaining advantageous time can be grasped.

(27) In the first embodiment, based on the end of the winning variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73, the counting of the variation display time in the variation display of the other unit area is temporarily stopped, and the above The above count is restarted based on the end of support based on the winning variation display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the count is not restarted may be used. In this case, for example, the variable display time may be reset based on the end of the support, or the support related to the variable display that is the target of suspension may be started immediately after the end of the support. However, paying attention to the variety of games, the configuration of pausing is preferable.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, the process related to the setting of the hold command (prior identification process) is immediately executed based on the acquisition of the hold information, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first electric accessory 41a. The process related to the setting of the hold command may be executed based on the start of the support or the first open / close execution mode. Even in this case, the hold notice effect can be executed. However, paying attention to the fact that the time-saving hold notice effect can be executed, it is better to perform it immediately based on the acquisition of the hold information.

(29) In each of the above embodiments, a hold command based on the hold information is transmitted to the voice emission control device 102 each time the hold information is acquired, and the voice emission control device 102 stores the hold information each time. However, the present invention may be limited to, for example, a configuration in which only a hold command based on hold information related to the next game round is transmitted. Even in this case, various hold notice effects can be executed, and the storage capacity of the RAM 244 can be reduced. However, considering the complexity of processing, it is better to store the data each time.

(30) In the first embodiment, if one of the support of the second electric accessory 42a and the support of the third electric accessory 43a is supported during the advantageous state, the support of the other is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which both are supported may be used. As a result, it is possible to increase the benefits given to the player.

As a specific configuration, for example, in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, the other variation display is not suspended based on the end of the winning variation display of one unit area.

(31) In the first embodiment, the support lottery is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the first through gate 51 or the second through gate 52, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same type of game Any configuration may be used as long as the operation (specific control) is performed. For example, based on the passage of the game ball through the first through gate 51 or the second through gate 52, for example, the game ball may be paid out as a privilege of the same type.

(32) In the first embodiment, based on the completion of the winning variation display of the first unit area 71, the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the trigger of the variation display are triggered. The configuration is such that the support lottery result is reset, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only the support lottery result may be reset. In this case, the variation display is terminated without displaying the stop result after the variation display time has elapsed.

Further, based on the end of the winning variation display of the first unit area 71, a part or all of the hold information stored in the second electric service holding area 232 and the third electric service holding area 233 is deleted. It may be configured.

(33) In the first embodiment, the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71 is a predetermined fixed time, but the time is not limited to this and may be varied. In this case, it is preferable that the maximum time of the winning variation display time is set shorter than the shortest variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. As a result, the game playability described in each of the above embodiments can be realized.

Further, for example, the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71 (the average time when the winning variation display time fluctuates) is calculated from the average time of the variation display times of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. May be set short.

Further, in the first embodiment, the deviation variation display time of the first unit area 71 is configured to fluctuate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined fixed time may be set. In this case, the fixed time may be set so that the variation display in the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 can be performed a plurality of times. However, when paying attention to the degree of attention to the advantageous time and the diversity of the game, the configuration in which the deviation variation display time is varied is preferable.

Further, the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be set to a predetermined fixed time instead of the variable configuration. In this case, each variation display time may be set so that the fixed time is longer than the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71 and shorter than the deviation variation display time of the first unit area 71.

In short, when the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the winning variation display is likely to end before the variation display of the other unit areas 72 and 73, while the first unit area 71 If the deviation display is performed, each variation display time is set so that the variation display can be performed a plurality of times in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 during the deviation variation display. Good.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(34) In each of the above embodiments, the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 42a or the third is displayed during the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 (in the second embodiment, the deviation variation display of the first result display unit 306a). The support of the electric accessory 43a (in the second embodiment, the second opening / closing execution mode) can be performed a plurality of times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the support may be completed only once. In this case, it is preferable to manage the game appropriately by adjusting the expectation of the game ball given based on one support, the winning probability of the support lottery (big hit lottery in the second embodiment), and the like.

(35) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories such as pachinko machines that generate a right when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device and become a big hit. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and sparrow balls.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display unit, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. A part of the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

Further, the gaming machine body supported to be opened and closed by the outer frame is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. A part of the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Based on the first lottery opportunity (winning of the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, winning of the upper operating ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments), the first specific control (first embodiment). The first lottery means (processing of step S603 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment and the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments). The function of executing the process of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) and
A second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (a prize for the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, a prize for the lower operating ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments). ), A second specific control different from the first specific control (support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, second opening / closing in the second and third embodiments). A second lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute (execution mode) (a function of executing the process of step S1003 or step S1209 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, step S1803 of MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). Function to execute processing) and
With
The second specific control is a predetermined period after the lottery by the second lottery means is performed when the lottery result by the second lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control. This is performed when the winning variation display time of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment and the winning variation display time of the second result display unit 306b in the second and third embodiments have elapsed. And
Based on the lottery result by the first lottery means being the winning result, the invalidation means (MPU 202 variable reset process) for invalidating at least one of the second lottery opportunity and the lottery result by the second lottery means A game machine characterized by having a function to execute).

According to the feature A1, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently. As a result, the player can be made to confirm the state of the lottery by the two lottery means at the same time.

In such a configuration, at least one of the second lottery opportunity and the lottery result by the second lottery means is invalidated based on the lottery result by the first lottery means being the winning result. Thereby, the lottery result by the first lottery means can be prioritized while the two lottery means are performed independently, and it is possible to provide a novel game in which the lottery mode of these lottery means is related. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature A2. Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the change display of the symbol is started in the first display unit (first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). The first display control means for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, in the second and third embodiments. (Function to control the display of the first result display unit 306a of MPU202) and
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, the second display unit different from the first display unit (the second unit area 72 in the first embodiment or the third unit area 73, the second in the second and third embodiments). 2 The second display control means (steps S904 to S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for starting the change display of the symbol on the result display unit 306b) and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means. A function of executing the processes of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of controlling the display of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
With
Each of the display control means can display the change of the symbol on the other display while the change of the symbol is displayed on one of the display units.
The invalidation means is used when a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on the second display unit. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that the change display of the symbol performed in the second display unit and the lottery result that triggered the change display are invalidated.

According to the feature A2, the change display of the symbol is performed independently in the first display unit and the second display unit. Then, when the specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit or the second display unit, the first specific control or the second specific control is performed. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is performed may occur during the change display of the symbol on one of the display units, so that it is possible to provide a novel game, and more preferably improve the interest. Can be planned.

In such a configuration, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit, it becomes an opportunity for the change display of the symbol and the change display performed on the second display unit. The lottery result will be invalidated. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second specific control is not executed even though the specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that may occur by invalidating the lottery result by the second lottery means.

Feature A3. The first display control means is a first period determining means for determining a first change display period, which is a period of change display of the symbol in the first display unit (processing of steps S606 and 608 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment). (A function to execute the process of steps S1706 and 1709 of MPU202 in the second and third embodiments), and when the change display of the symbol is performed in the first display unit, the first period is determined. In the first change display period determined by the means, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode.
The second display control means is a second period determining means for determining a second change display period, which is a period of the change display of the symbol in the second display unit (process of steps S606 and 608 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment). (Function to execute the function of executing the process of steps S1806, 1808, 1809 of MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when the change display of the symbol is performed in the second display unit, the second In the second change display period determined by the period determination means, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode.
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the first change display period is set to be shorter than the second change display period.
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the first change display period is set to be longer than the second change display period. The gaming machine according to the feature A2.

According to the feature A3, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the change display of the symbol of the first display unit ends at the timing before the end timing of the change display of the symbol in the second display unit. Easy to do. As a result, the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control.

On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the change display of the symbol of the second display unit is likely to end at a timing earlier than the end timing of the change display of the symbol on the first display unit. As a result, the second specific control can be executed with priority over the first specific control. Therefore, the specific control to be executed can be changed according to the first change display period. Therefore, the change display of the symbol of the first display unit and the specific control can be closely related.

Feature A4. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down, and
The first ball entry section (first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, upper operating ports 303, 401 in the second and third embodiments) and the second entry portion provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball. The ball portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, lower actuating ports 304, 402 in the second and third embodiments) and
With
The first lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the first ball entry section.
The second lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the second ball entry section.
Feature A2 or a feature A2 characterized in that it is configured so that a ball can enter the first ball entry section when a launch operation is performed aiming at the ball entry into the second ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature A3.

According to the feature A4, when the ball is aimed at entering the second ball entry portion, the ball may naturally enter the first ball entry portion. Thereby, by adjusting the launch mode of the game ball, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally generating the ball into the second ball entry portion. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the change display of the symbol of the second display unit over the change display of the symbol of the first display unit and suppress the act of intentionally executing the second specific control. It is possible to prevent a game different from the current game from being played.

Feature A5. The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are a first pass section (first through gate 51) and a second pass section (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) through which a game ball can pass. And
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion.
The game ball so that the frequency of the game ball passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is smaller than the frequency of passing through the first passing portion and passing through the second passing portion. The gaming machine according to feature A4, which comprises a flow-down mode regulating means (regulation nail 64b) for regulating the flow-down mode.

According to the feature A5, the game ball easily passes through the second passing portion after passing through the first passing portion. As a result, after the lottery by the first lottery means is performed, the lottery by the second lottery means is likely to be performed. Therefore, the start timing of the symbol change display on the first display unit tends to be earlier than the start timing of the symbol change display on the second display unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the change display of the symbol of the first display unit ends during the change display of the symbol in the second display unit.

Feature A6. The first display control means
Period determining means for determining the change display period, which is the period of the change display of the symbol in the first display unit (function for executing the process of steps S606, 608 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third embodiments. (Function to execute the process of steps S1706 and 1709 of MPU202) in
A period measuring means for measuring the change display period determined by the period determining means (a function of executing a process of updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). (Function to update the first fluctuation display time counter Tx) and
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed in the first display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the period determination means.
When the change display of the symbol is displayed on the first display unit and the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit, the change display period Pause means for suspending the measurement of the above (a function for executing the pause process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and suspending the measurement of the fluctuation display time related to the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature A6, when the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit and the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit, the change display is performed. Since the measurement of the period is temporarily stopped, the player can execute the second specific control without worrying about the change display of the symbol in the first display unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted during the second specific control, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the second specific control.

Further, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed, the lottery result by the first lottery means is not invalidated. As a result, it is possible to diversify the aspect of the relationship between the lottery result of the first lottery means and the lottery result of the second lottery means, and it is possible to diversify the game.

Feature A7. The change is based on the termination of the second specific control related to the display of the specific stop result that triggered the suspension in a situation where the measurement of the change display period is temporarily stopped by the pause means. Measurement resuming means for resuming measurement of the display period (a function for executing the processes of steps S524 to S526 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and a variable display relating to the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments. The gaming machine according to feature A6, which is characterized by having a function of resuming time measurement).

According to the feature A7, the measurement of the change display period is temporarily stopped when the specific stop result is displayed, and then the change display period is changed based on the end of the second specific control related to the display of the specific stop result. Measurement is resumed. As a result, it is possible to use the change display of the symbol until the temporary stop and the lottery result that triggered the change display.

Feature A8. When the pause means displays a non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the second specific control on the second display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit. The game machine according to the feature A6 or the feature A7, wherein the measurement of the change display period is not temporarily stopped.

According to the feature A8, when the non-specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit in the situation where the symbol change display is performed on the first display unit, the symbol change display on the first display unit is performed. Is continuously performed, so that the first specific control can be executed. As a result, when the lottery result of the second lottery means is a non-winning result, the lottery by the first lottery means can be focused on. Therefore, it is possible to gradually pay attention to the change display of the symbol based on the lottery by the second lottery means and the change display of the symbol based on the lottery by the first lottery means. Therefore, the two can be closely related.

Feature A9. The change display period and the period determination means are the first change display period and the first period determination means, respectively.
The second display control means is a second period determining means for determining a second change display period, which is a period of the change display of the symbol in the second display unit (process of steps S1006, 1209 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment). The function of executing the process of step S1806 to step S1808 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when the change display of the symbol is performed on the second display unit, the second period In the second change display period determined by the determining means, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode.
Each period determination means is
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, each change display period is such that the first change display period is likely to be shorter than the second change display period. Decide,
Further, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the symbol on the second display unit is displayed during the change display of the symbol on the first display unit. The gaming machine according to feature A7 or feature A8, wherein each change display period is determined so that the change display can be performed a plurality of times.

According to the feature A9, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the change display of the symbol of the first display unit ends at a timing before the end timing of the change display of the symbol in the second display unit. Easy to do. As a result, the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control.

On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the change display of the symbol on the second display unit may be performed a plurality of times during the change display of the symbol on the first display unit. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which a series of games based on the lottery by the second lottery means are continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness.

Feature A10. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down, and
Variable ball entry means provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state (second electric combination winning opening 42 or third electric combination winning opening 43, second and third embodiments in the first embodiment). 2nd prize opening 302a) and
A privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) for granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means.
When the second specific control is performed, the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is set to the open state (the second electric power in the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). A function to execute the combination opening / closing process and the third electric combination opening / closing process, a function to control the opening / closing of the second special winning opening 302a in the second and third embodiments), and
With
The number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means during the second specific control is predetermined.
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the period determination means can be used in the first display unit by changing each change display period. The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the number of times of the change display of the symbol of the second display unit that can be performed during the change display of the symbol can be changed.

According to the feature A10, when the second specific control is performed, the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is performed. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, so that a privilege can be given to the player. In this case, since the number of game balls that can be entered into the variable ball entry means during the second specific control is predetermined, the upper limit of the privilege amount obtained during the second specific control of 1 is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege, and it is possible to easily manage the game.

In such a configuration, the number of times the symbol change is displayed on the second display unit that can be performed during the symbol change display on the first display unit can be changed. Therefore, by changing the number of times, the player can be notified. You can change the amount of benefits to be granted. As a result, it is possible to change the amount of benefits given to the player while easily managing the game.

Feature A11. In the second period determining means, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit. It is characterized in that the second change display period is determined so that the second change display period is likely to be shorter than when there is no change display or when the change display of the symbol related to the winning result is performed. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10.

According to the feature A11, when the change display of the symbol related to the winning result is performed in the first display unit, a relatively long second change display period can be easily determined. As a result, the first change display period tends to be shorter than the second change display period, and the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control. However, if the second change display period is lengthened, the interval at which the second specific control is performed becomes long, so that there may be a disadvantage that the game does not proceed smoothly when the second specific control is continuously performed.

On the other hand, according to this feature, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed in the first display unit, a relatively short second change display period can be easily determined. As a result, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is not performed in the first display unit, the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control, and the above inconvenience can be avoided. it can.

Feature A12. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down, and
An entry portion (upper operating port 401 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A variable ball entry means (lower operating port 402 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2008 to S2010 in the MPU 202) that executes the variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state.
With
The first lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the ball entry portion.
The second lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means.
The variable input is based on the change display of the symbol corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control in the first display unit. From the low expectation state (low frequency support mode) where the expectation of entering the ball means is relatively low, to the high expectation state (high frequency) where the expectation of entering the variable ball means is relatively high. The game according to any one of features A9 to A11, which comprises means for shifting to (support mode) (a function of executing the processes of steps S2005 and S2009 in MPU202, or steps S2006 and S2010). Machine.

According to the feature A12, the expectation of entering the variable ball entry means is based on the fact that the first display unit displays a change in the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means being a non-winning result. The degree becomes high. As a result, the lottery by the second lottery means is easily performed, so that the second specific control is easily performed in the situation where the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the second specific control in the situation where the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed in the first display unit.

In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, "as a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once by the variable ball entry control means, the variable entry in the case of the open state". A high expectation mode and a low expectation mode are set so that the expectation of the game ball entering the ball means is relatively high and low, and the first display unit shows the non-winning result. A configuration is conceivable in which the mode of the variable ball entry means is switched from the low expectation mode to the high expectation mode based on the change display of the symbol corresponding to the above.

Feature A13. The change display period, the period determination means, and the period measurement means are the first change display period, the first period determination means, and the first period measurement means, respectively.
The second display control means
The second period determining means for determining the second change display period, which is the period for displaying the change of the symbol in the second display unit (the function of executing the process of steps S1006, 1209 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment),
A process of updating the second timer counter T2 or the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment is executed as the second period measuring means for measuring the second change display period determined by the second period determining means. Function) and
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed in the second display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the second period determination means.
Whether to execute the third specific control (support of the third electric accessory 43a) different from each specific control based on the third lottery opportunity (winning to the third through gate 53) different from each lottery opportunity. A third lottery means for performing a lottery of whether or not (a function of executing the process of step S1209 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) and
Based on the lottery by the third lottery means, the third display which starts the change display of the symbol in the third display part different from each display part and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result by the third lottery means. A control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1204 to S1214 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) and
With
The third display control means
A third period determining means (a function of executing the process of S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for determining the third change display period, which is the period of the change display of the symbol in the third display unit, and
A third period measuring means (a function of updating the third timer counter T3 in the first embodiment) for measuring the third change display period determined by the third period determining means, and
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed in the third display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the third period determination means.
The third display control means can start the change display of the symbol on the third display unit during the change display of the symbol on the first display unit or the second display unit.
The pause means
When the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit, the first period measuring means and The measurement of each change display period by the third period measuring means is temporarily stopped.
When the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the third specific control is displayed on the third display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit, the first period measuring means and The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A12, wherein the measurement of each change display period by the second period measuring means is temporarily stopped.

According to the feature A13, the lottery of the third lottery means and the change display of the symbol of the third display unit are performed independently of the other lottery and the change display of the other symbols.

In such a configuration, when the specific stop result is displayed on either the second display unit or the third display unit, the measurement of the change display period on the other display unit is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can execute the specific control without worrying about the change display of the symbol of the other display unit. As a result, the degree of attention to the specific control can be increased.

Further, according to the relationship with the feature A7, the measurement of the change display period on the other display unit is temporarily stopped by displaying the specific stop result on one of the second display unit and the third display unit. Then, based on the completion of the specific control related to the specific stop result, the above measurement is restarted. As a result, the interval between one specific control and the next specific control can be made irregular, and the monotonization of the game can be suppressed.

Feature A14. The features A1 to A13 characterized in that the regulation means for regulating the lottery by the second lottery means (the function of affirming the process of step S901 or step S1201 of MPU202, etc.) is provided during the first specific control. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature A14, since the lottery by the second lottery means is regulated during the first specific control, it is possible to avoid the event that the first specific control and the second specific control are executed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to avoid the complexity of the game that may occur due to the provision of the two lottery means and the two specific controls, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Feature A15. The invalidation means does not invalidate the lottery result of the second lottery means when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14.

According to the feature A15, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the lottery result of the second lottery means is not invalidated, so that the second specific control can be executed. As a result, when the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the lottery by the second lottery means can be focused on. Therefore, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means can be noticed step by step. Therefore, the two can be closely related.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the state in which the second specific control is executed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is executed.

According to the feature A16, it is assumed that the player plays the game with the expectation that the lottery result by the first lottery means will be a non-winning result. As a result, unlike the conventional game, which is advantageous to the player when the winning result is obtained, the game can be given unexpectedness.

Feature A17. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down, and
A first variable ball-entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (first electric service winning opening 41 in the first embodiment, first large winning opening in the second and third embodiments). 301a) and the second variable ball entry means (second electric combination winning opening 42 or third electric combination winning opening 43 in the first embodiment, second major winning opening 302a in the second and third embodiments).
A privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) that grants a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into each variable entry means.
With
In the first specific control, the opening / closing operation of the first variable ball entry means is performed.
In the second specific control, the opening / closing operation of the second variable ball entry means is performed.
The expected degree of entry into the second variable ball entry means in the second specific control is set higher than the expected degree of entry into the first variable entry means in the first specific control. The gaming machine according to feature A16, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature A17, the expectation of the ball entering the second variable ball entry means in the second specific control is set higher than the expectation of the ball entering the first variable ball entry means in the first specific control. Therefore, the second specific control tends to give more benefits to the player. As a result, the state in which the second specific control is performed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is performed.

As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, a configuration of "providing a regulation unit for restricting entry into the first variable entry means" can be considered.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features A1 to A17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D7, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, the following features G1 to G4, and the following features H1 The configuration limited to any one of ~ H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Based on the first lottery opportunity (winning of the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, winning of the upper operating ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments), the first specific control (first embodiment). The first lottery means (processing of step S603 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment and the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments). The function of executing the process of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) and
A second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (a prize for the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, a prize for the lower operating ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments). ), A second specific control different from the first specific control (support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, the second opening / closing in the second and third embodiments). A second lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute (execution mode) (a function of executing the process of S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and the process of S1803 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). Function to execute) and
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the change display of the symbol is started in the first display unit (first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). The first display control means for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, in the second and third embodiments. (Function to control the display of the first result display unit 306a of MPU202) and
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, the second display unit different from the first display unit (the second unit area 72 in the first embodiment or the third unit area 73, the second in the second and third embodiments). 2 The second display control means (step S905 to step S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for starting the change display of the symbol on the result display unit 306b) and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means. A function of executing the processes of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of controlling the display of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments).
With
The first display control means
First period determining means for determining the first change display period, which is the change display period of the symbol in the first display unit (functions for executing the process of steps S606, 608 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third The function of executing the process of steps S1706 and 1709 of MPU202 in the embodiment) and
A first period measuring means for measuring the first change display period (a function of executing a process of updating the first timer counter T1 in the first embodiment, a first fluctuation display time counter of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). Function to update Tx) and
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed in the first display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the first period determination means.
The second display control means
Second period determining means for determining the second change display period, which is the change display period of the symbol in the second display unit (functions for executing the process of steps S1006, 1209 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third The function of executing the processes of steps S1806 to S1808 of MPU202 in the embodiment) and
In the second period measuring means for measuring the second change display period (a function of executing a process of updating the second timer counter T2 or the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, in the second and third embodiments. (Function to update the second fluctuation display time counter Ty of MPU202) and
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed in the second display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the second period determination means.
The second change is based on the fact that the first display unit displays the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed in each display unit. While the measurement of the display period is stopped, the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a measurement stop means (a function of executing a pause process and a fluctuation reset process of the MPU 202) for stopping the measurement of the first change display period based on the above.

According to the feature B1, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently, and based on these lottery, the change display of the symbol is displayed in the first display unit and the second display unit. Each is done independently. Then, when the change display period corresponding to each display unit elapses and the specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit or the second display unit, the first specific control or the second specific control is performed. Will be executed. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed may occur during the change display of the symbol on one of the display units, so that it is possible to provide a novel game and improve the interest. Can be done.

In such a configuration, the measurement of the change display period related to the other display unit is stopped based on the fact that the specific stop result is displayed on one display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit. .. As a result, the player can execute the specific control based on the specific stop result without worrying about the change display of the symbol on the other display unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted during the specific control, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific control.

Feature B2. In the measurement stop means, the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit. Based on this, a pause means (a function of executing the pause process of the MPU 202) for suspending the measurement of the first change display period is provided.
Based on the completion of the second specific control based on the display of the specific stop result, the measurement restart means (function for executing the processes of steps S524 to S526 of the MPU 202) for restarting the measurement of the first change display period is provided. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that it is provided.

According to feature B2, when the specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit, the measurement of the first change display period is temporarily stopped, and then the second specific control based on the display of the specific stop result is terminated. Based on this, the measurement of the first change display period is restarted. As a result, it is possible to use the change display of the symbol until the temporary stop and the lottery result that triggered the change display.

Feature B3. In the case where the temporary stop means displays a non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the second specific control on the second display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the measurement of the first change display period is not paused.

According to the feature B3, when the non-specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit in the situation where the symbol change display is performed on the first display unit, the symbol change display on the first display unit is performed. Is continuously performed, so that the first specific control can be executed. As a result, when the lottery result of the second lottery means is a non-winning result, the lottery by the first lottery means can be focused on. Therefore, it is possible to gradually pay attention to the change display of the symbol based on the lottery by the second lottery means and the change display of the symbol based on the lottery by the first lottery means. Therefore, the two can be closely related.

Feature B4. When a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, each period determining means may perform the change display of the symbol on the second display unit a plurality of times during the change display of the symbol on the first display unit. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, wherein each change display period is determined so as to be possible.

According to the feature B4, when the specific condition is satisfied, the change display of the symbol on the second display unit may be performed a plurality of times during the change display of the symbol on the first display unit. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which a series of games based on the lottery by the second lottery means are continuously performed. Therefore, while the lottery by each lottery means and the change display of the symbol in each display unit are performed independently, when a specific condition is satisfied, a series of games based on the lottery by the second lottery means are continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to give the game a surprise.

Feature B5. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down, and
Variable ball entry means provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state (second electric combination winning opening 42 or third electric combination winning opening 43, second and third embodiments in the first embodiment). 2nd prize opening 302a) and
A privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) for granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means.
When the second specific control is executed, the variable ball entry control means (the first of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) that executes the variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is set to the open state. (2) A function for executing the electric service opening / closing process and the third electric service opening / closing process, a function for controlling the opening / closing of the second special winning opening 302a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments)
With
The number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means during the second specific control is predetermined.
When the specific condition is satisfied, each of the period determining means can be performed during the change display of the symbol in the first display unit by changing each change display period of the second display unit. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the number of times of change display of the symbol can be changed.

According to the feature B5, when the second specific control is performed, the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is performed. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, so that a privilege can be given to the player. In this case, since the number of game balls that can be entered into the variable ball entry means during the second specific control is predetermined, the upper limit of the privilege amount obtained during the second specific control of 1 is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege, and it is possible to easily manage the game.

In such a configuration, the number of times the symbol change is displayed on the second display unit that can be performed during the symbol change display on the first display unit can be changed. Therefore, by changing the number of times, the player can be notified. You can change the amount of benefits to be granted. As a result, it is possible to change the amount of benefits given to the player while easily managing the game.

Feature B6. A third lottery means (step S1209 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute a third specific control different from each specific control based on a third lottery opportunity different from each lottery opportunity. Function to execute the processing of) and
Based on the lottery by the third lottery means, the third display which starts the change display of the symbol in the third display part different from each display part and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result by the third lottery means. A control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1204 to S1214 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) and
With
The third display control means
A third period determining means (a function of executing the process of S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for determining the third change display period, which is the period of the change display of the symbol in the third display unit, and
A third period measuring means for measuring the third change display period (a function of updating the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) and
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed in the third display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the third period determination means.
The third display control means can start the change display of the symbol on the third display unit during the change display of the symbol on the first display unit or the second display unit.
The pause means
When the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit, the first period measuring means and The measurement of each change display period by the third period measuring means is temporarily stopped.
When the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the third specific control is displayed on the third display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit, the first period measuring means and The measurement of each change display period by the second period measuring means is temporarily suspended.
The measurement restarting means is characterized in that it restarts the measurement of each change display period paused by the pause means based on the end of the specific control related to the specific stop result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B2 to B5.

According to the feature B6, the lottery of the third lottery means and the change display of the symbol of the third display unit are performed independently of the other lottery and the change display of the other symbols.

In such a configuration, when the specific stop result is displayed on either the second display unit or the third display unit, the measurement of the change display period on the other display unit is temporarily stopped. Then, the measurement is restarted based on the end of the specific control related to the specific stop result. As a result, the player can execute the specific control without worrying about the change display of the symbol of the other display unit. As a result, the degree of attention to the specific control can be increased.

Further, according to the relationship between the change display of the symbol of the second display unit and the change display of the symbol of the third display unit, the change display on the other display unit is caused by displaying the specific stop result on one display unit. The measurement of the period is suspended, and the measurement is restarted based on the end of the specific control related to the specific stop result. As a result, the interval between one specific control and the next specific control can be made irregular, and the monotonization of the game can be suppressed.

Feature B7. In the measurement stop means, the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on the second display unit. Based on this, by invalidating the measurement of the second change display period, the change display of the symbol of the second display unit is invalidated, and the lottery result of the second lottery means that triggered the change display is obtained. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, which comprises an invalidation means (a function of executing a fluctuation reset process of the MPU 202) for invalidating.

According to the feature B7, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed in the first display unit, the change display of the symbol performed in the second display unit and the trigger of the change display are performed. The lottery result of the second lottery means is invalidated. As a result, while the lottery by each lottery means and the change display of the symbol in each display unit are independently performed, the lottery by the first lottery means and the change display of the symbol in the second display unit are performed rather than the lottery by the second lottery means and the change display of the symbol in the second display unit. It is possible to give priority to the change display of the symbol in the first display unit. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game in which the lottery results of these lottery means are related to each other while displaying the change of the symbol in each lottery means and each display unit independently.

Feature B8. Each period determination means is
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, each change display period is such that the first change display period is likely to be shorter than the second change display period. Decide,
Further, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the first change display period is likely to be longer than the second change display period. The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein the change display period is determined.

According to the feature B8, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the change display of the symbol of the first display unit ends at a timing before the end timing of the change display of the symbol in the second display unit. Easy to do. As a result, the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control.

On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the change display of the symbol of the second display unit is likely to end at a timing earlier than the end timing of the change display of the symbol on the first display unit. As a result, the second specific control can be executed with priority over the first specific control. Therefore, the specific control to be executed can be changed according to the first change display period. Therefore, the change display of the symbol of the first display unit and the game state can be closely related.

Feature B9. In the second period determining means, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed in the first display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in the first display unit. It is characterized in that the second change display period is determined so that the second change display period is likely to be shorter than when there is no change display or when the change display of the symbol related to the winning result is performed. The gaming machine according to feature B8.

According to the feature B9, when the change display of the symbol related to the winning result is performed in the first display unit, a relatively long second change display period can be easily determined. As a result, the first change display period tends to be shorter than the second change display period, and the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control. However, if the second change display period is lengthened, the interval at which the second specific control is performed becomes long, which may cause a disadvantage that the game does not proceed smoothly. In particular, according to the configuration of feature B4, since the second specific control can be continuously performed, the above-mentioned inconvenience tends to be remarkable.

On the other hand, according to this feature, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed in the first display unit, a relatively short second change display period can be easily determined. As a result, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is not performed in the first display unit, the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control, and the above inconvenience can be avoided. it can.

Feature B10. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down, and
An entry portion (upper operating port 401 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A variable ball entry means (lower operating port 402 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2008 to S2010 in the MPU 202) that executes the variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state.
With
The first lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the ball entry portion.
The second lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means.
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the change display of the symbol is performed in the first display unit. From the low expectation state (low frequency support mode) where the expectation of entering the ball means is relatively low, to the high expectation state (high frequency) where the expectation of entering the variable ball means is relatively high. The gaming machine according to feature B8 or feature B9, which comprises means for shifting to (support mode) (a function of executing the processes of step S2005 and step S2009 in MPU202, or steps S2006 and S2010).

According to the feature B10, the expectation of entering the variable ball entry means is based on the fact that the first display unit displays a change in the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means being a non-winning result. The degree becomes high. As a result, the lottery by the second lottery means is easily performed, so that the second specific control is easily performed in the situation where the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed in the first display unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the second specific control in the situation where the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed in the first display unit.

In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, "as a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once by the variable ball entry control means, the variable entry in the case of the open state". A high expectation mode and a low expectation mode are set so that the expectation of the game ball entering the ball means is relatively high and low, and the first display unit shows the non-winning result. A configuration is conceivable in which the mode of the variable ball entry means is switched from the low expectation mode to the high expectation mode based on the change display of the symbol corresponding to the above.

Feature B11. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down, and
The first ball entry section (first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, upper operating ports 303, 401 in the second and third embodiments) and the second entry portion provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball. The ball portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, lower actuating ports 304, 402 in the second and third embodiments) and
With
The first lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the first ball entry section.
The second lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the second ball entry section.
Features B7 to feature B7 to be characterized in that the ball is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry section when the launch operation is performed aiming at the ball entry into the second ball entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of B10.

According to the feature B11, when aiming to enter the second ball entry portion, the ball may naturally enter the first ball entry portion. Thereby, by adjusting the launch mode of the game ball, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally generating the ball into the second ball entry portion. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the change display of the symbol of the second display unit over the change display of the symbol of the first display unit and suppress the act of intentionally executing the second specific control. It is possible to prevent a game different from the current game from being played.

Feature B12. The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are a first pass section (first through gate 51) and a second pass section (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) through which a game ball can pass. And
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion.
The game ball so that the frequency of the game ball passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is smaller than the frequency of passing through the first passing portion and passing through the second passing portion. The gaming machine according to feature B11, which comprises a flow-down mode regulating means (regulation nail 64b) for regulating the flow-down mode of the above.

According to the feature B12, the game ball easily passes through the second passing portion after passing through the first passing portion. As a result, after the lottery by the first lottery means is performed, the lottery by the second lottery means is likely to be performed. Therefore, the start timing of the symbol change display on the first display unit tends to be earlier than the start timing of the symbol change display on the second display unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the change display of the symbol of the first display unit ends during the change display of the symbol in the second display unit.

Feature B13. It is characterized by having a regulating means (a function of affirming the process of step S901 or step S1201 of MPU202) for restricting the execution of the change display of the symbol in the second display unit during the first specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B7 to B12.

According to the feature B13, since the execution of the symbol change display in the second display unit is restricted during the first specific control, the first specific control can be performed without worrying about the symbol change display in the second display unit. Can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted.

Feature B14. The invalidation means is used when a non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on the second display unit. Is one of features B7 to B13, characterized in that the change display of the symbol in the second display unit and the lottery result of the second lottery means that triggered the change display are not invalidated. The game machine described in.

According to the feature B14, when the non-specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol on the second display unit and the lottery result of the second lottery means that triggered the change display are displayed. Since it is not invalidated, the second specific control can be executed. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the change display of the symbol in the second display unit. Therefore, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means can be noticed step by step. Therefore, the two can be closely related.

Feature B15. The gaming machine according to feature B14, wherein the state in which the second specific control is executed is a state more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is executed.

According to the feature B15, it is assumed that the player plays the game with the expectation that the lottery result by the first lottery means will be a non-winning result. As a result, unlike the conventional game, which is advantageous to the player when the winning result is obtained, the game can be given unexpectedness.

Feature B16. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down, and
A first variable ball-entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (first electric service winning opening 41 in the first embodiment, first large winning opening in the second and third embodiments). 301a) and the second variable ball entry means (second electric combination winning opening 42 or third electric combination winning opening 43 in the first embodiment, second major winning opening 302a in the second and third embodiments).
A privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) that grants a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into each variable entry means.
With
In the first specific control, the opening / closing operation of the first variable ball entry means is performed.
In the second specific control, the opening / closing operation of the second variable ball entry means is performed.
The expected degree of entry into the second variable ball entry means in the second specific control is set higher than the expected degree of entry into the first variable entry means in the first specific control. The gaming machine according to feature B15, which is characterized by being

According to feature B16, the expectation of entering the second variable ball entry means in the second specific control is set higher than the expectation of entry into the first variable entry means in the first specific control. Therefore, the second specific control tends to give more benefits to the player. As a result, the state in which the second specific control is performed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is performed.

As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, a configuration of "providing a regulation unit for restricting entry into the first variable entry means" can be considered.

Feature B17. Based on the first lottery opportunity (winning of the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, winning of the upper operating ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments), the first specific control (first embodiment). The first lottery means (processing of step S603 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment and the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments). The function of executing the process of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) and
A second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (a prize for the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, a prize for the lower operating ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments). ), A second specific control different from the first specific control (support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, the second opening / closing in the second and third embodiments). A second lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute (execution mode) (a function of executing the process of S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and the process of S1803 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). Function to execute) and
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the change display of the symbol is started in the first display unit (first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). The first display control means for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, in the second and third embodiments. (Function to control the display of the first result display unit 306a of MPU202) and
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, the second display unit different from the first display unit (the second unit area 72 in the first embodiment or the third unit area 73, the second in the second and third embodiments). 2 The second display control means (step S905 to step S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for starting the change display of the symbol on the result display unit 306b) and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means. A function of executing the processes of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of controlling the display of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments).
With
The first display control means
First period determining means for determining the first change display period, which is the change display period of the symbol in the first display unit (functions for executing the process of steps S606, 608 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third The function of executing the process of steps S1706 and 1709 of MPU202 in the embodiment) and
A first period measuring means for measuring the first change display period (a function of executing a process of updating the first timer counter T1 in the first embodiment, a first fluctuation display time counter of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). Function to update Tx) and
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed in the first display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the first period determination means.
The first change display is based on the fact that the second display unit displays the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed in each display unit. A gaming machine characterized by having a measurement stop means (a function of executing a pause process and a fluctuation reset process of the MPU 202) for stopping the measurement of a period.

According to the feature B17, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently, and based on these lottery, the change display of the symbol is displayed in the first display unit and the second display unit. Each is done independently. Then, when the change display period corresponding to each display unit elapses and the specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit or the second display unit, the first specific control or the second specific control is performed. Will be executed. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed may occur during the change display of the symbol on one of the display units, so that it is possible to provide a novel game and improve the interest. Can be done.

In such a configuration, the measurement of the change display period related to the first display unit is stopped based on the fact that the specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit. .. As a result, the player can execute the second specific control without worrying about the change display of the symbol in the first display unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted during the second specific control, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the second specific control.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features B1 to B17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D7, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, the following features G1 to G4, and the following features H1 The configuration limited to any one of ~ H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for passing through the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). Function to execute winning process for the operating port) and
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers (first electric service holding area 231, second, and third implementation in the first embodiment). Hold ball storage area 321) in the form and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the preset grant information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. In the case of the case, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the plurality of special information (a function of executing the support lottery process of the first normal figure fluctuation start process in the MPU 202 of the first embodiment, the second and third implementations). The function of executing the process of step S1703 in the MPU 202 of the form) and
Based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined grant support state. Transition means (a function of executing the first opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function of shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments),
The game rotation operation was started prior to the grant determination means performing the grant determination or based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and corresponded to the determination result of the grant determination means. The end of the game round operation as a notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game times control means (step S505 to step MPU202 in the first embodiment) for controlling a predetermined notification means (first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). A function of executing the process of S517, a function of controlling the display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
In a game machine equipped with
In the game time control means, when the determination result of the grant determination means is the winning game time corresponding to the grant correspondence result, the grant correspondence period corresponding to the grant correspondence state from the end timing of the winning game round ( When the period in which the first electric accessory 41a is supported in the first embodiment and the period in which the first opening / closing execution mode is performed in the second and third embodiments has elapsed, the following is performed for the winning game. It is to start the game round of
Of the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information reflecting the determination result when the special information related to the next game round is the target of the grant determination is obtained from the start of the next game round. (A function to execute a confirmation process for announcing the hold of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function to execute a process to set a hold command of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
Based on the specific result by the prior identification means, the next game round is related to the grant correspondence period after the end of the winning game round and the game round operation period in which the next game round is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with an effect executing means (a function of executing a normal hold notice effect and a time-saving normal hold notice effect in MPU 242) for performing a game turn effect.

According to the feature C1, when the winning game round is performed, the next game round is started after the granting correspondence period corresponding to the granting correspondence state elapses after the winning game round is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start of a new game round during the grant response state, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted.

In such a configuration, since the game rotation effect is executed over the granting response period and the game rotation operation period, it is possible to secure a period longer than the game rotation operation period as the effect period of the game rotation effect. As a result, it is possible to set a continuous effect for a long period as a game rotation effect, which cannot be set within the game rotation operation period. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game performance and improve the interest.

Feature C2. As the game rotation effect, the effect executing means starts a variable display of a pattern on a predetermined display means (display screen G) at least at a timing before the start timing of the next game rotation, and the next game The description according to the feature C1, wherein the stop result corresponding to the specific result of the prior identification means is displayed by the end timing of the next game round, which is a timing after the start timing of the round. Game machine.

According to the feature C2, the variation display of the pattern is performed over the grant correspondence period and the game rounding operation period. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the game rotation effect as a series of effects straddling the granting response period and the game rotation operation period.

Feature C3. When the special information related to the next game time is acquired at a timing before the end timing of the winning game time, the effect executing means has the granting response period corresponding to the winning game time. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, characterized in that the game rotation effect is executed based on the start.

According to the feature C3, if the special information related to the next game round has already been acquired at the end timing of the winning game round, the game round production is executed from the start of the grant correspondence period. As a result, it is possible to secure the production period of the game rotation production for the period corresponding to the grant.

Feature C4. When the special information related to the next game round is acquired during the granting period, the special information acquisition timing is used so that the game round production is completed by the end timing of the next game round. It is provided with an effect period determining means (a function of executing the process of step S1412 in MPU 242) for determining an effect period according to the period up to the end timing of the grant response period.
When the special information related to the next game time is acquired during the granting response period, the effect executing means executes the game time effect over the effect period determined by the effect period determining means. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the feature C4, when the special information related to the next game round is acquired during the grant response period, the game round effect is executed. As a result, the frequency of execution of the game rotation effect can be increased, so that the degree of attention to the game during the granting period can be further improved.

In this case, the effect period is set so that the game time effect is completed by the end timing of the next game time. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game rotation effect ends at a timing after the end timing of the next game rotation, and the game rotation production affects the next game rotation production.

Feature C5. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down, and
Variable ball-entry means provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state (first electric service winning opening 41 in the first embodiment, first large winning opening 301a in the second and third embodiments). When,
A privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 in the payout control device 117 based on a prize ball command) that grants a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means.
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching the variable entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state (a function for executing the first electric service opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second And the function of controlling the opening and closing of the first large winning opening 301a of the MPU 202 in the third embodiment),
With
During the granting response period, either the variable ball entry means is opened for a predetermined upper limit period, or the game balls enter the variable ball entry means for a predetermined upper limit number. It is a specific game period in which the specific game in which the variable ball entry control is continued until the event of is performed.
Limiting means for limiting the number of balls entering the variable ball entry means (first specific regulation nail in the first embodiment) so that the number of balls entering the variable ball entry means does not reach the upper limit period. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that it includes 64c, the regulation nail 307b) in the second and third embodiments.

According to the feature C5, it is a specific game period in which the specific game is performed based on the end of the winning game times. The specific game ends when either the upper limit period elapses or the upper limit number of balls is entered. As a result, the amount of benefits given to the player can be adjusted, and the game can be managed suitably.

In such a configuration, the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry means during the upper limit period does not reach the upper limit. As a result, since the specific game period corresponds only to the upper limit period without depending on the entry timing of the game ball, it is possible to easily grasp the production period of the game rotation effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the game rotation effect.

Feature C6. The grant response period differs depending on the special information that is the target of the grant determination in the winning game times.
The effect executing means includes means for determining the effect period of the game rotation effect corresponding to the grant response period, and executes the game time effect over the effect period determined by the means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature C6, the grant response period varies, and the effect period can be varied in response to the variation. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance.

According to the relationship with the feature C5, "The number of times the specific game is performed in the specific game period differs depending on the special information that is the target of the grant determination in the winning game time, and the effect. The execution means may have a means for determining the effect period of the game rotation effect corresponding to the number of times. "

Feature C7. The winning probability that the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result is set higher than the non-winning probability that is the non-grant correspondence result that the determination result of the grant determination does not correspond to the grant information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

According to the feature C7, since the winning probability is set higher than the non-winning probability, the winning game times are more likely to be performed than the game times corresponding to the non-granting correspondence result. As a result, the granting period is likely to occur continuously, so that it is possible to increase the opportunity to perform the game rotation effect.

Feature C8. The game according to feature C7, wherein the game round operation period of the winning game round is set shorter than the game round operation period of the non-winning game round corresponding to the non-granting correspondence result. Machine.

When the winning probability is higher than the non-winning probability, the frequency of occurrence of the grant response period is relatively high, so that the digestion rate of the game may decrease. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the operation period for the winning game is set to be relatively short, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the digestibility of the game.

Further, even in this case, since the production period of the game rotation production can be secured by the amount of the granting response period, the diversification of the game rotation production is ensured.

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the operating period for the winning game is set shorter than the granting period.

According to the feature C9, since the operation period for the winning game is set shorter than the granting period, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the digestibility of the game while ensuring the degree of freedom in the granting period. Can be done.

Further, even in this case, since the production period of the game rotation production can be secured by the amount of the granting response period, the diversification of the game rotation production is ensured.

Feature C10. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for passing through the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). Function to execute winning process for the operating port) and
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers (first electric service holding area 231, second, and third implementation in the first embodiment). Hold ball storage area 321) in the form and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the preset grant information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. In the case of the case, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the plurality of special information (a function of executing the support lottery process of the first normal figure fluctuation start process in the MPU 202 of the first embodiment, the second and third implementations). The function of executing the process of step S1703 in the MPU 202 of the form) and
Based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined grant support state. Transition means (a function of executing the first opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function of shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments),
The game rotation operation was started prior to the grant determination means performing the grant determination or based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and corresponded to the determination result of the grant determination means. The end of the game round operation as the notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game times control means (step S505 to step MPU202 in the first embodiment) for controlling a predetermined notification means (first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). A function of executing the process of S517, a function of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments to control the display of the first result display unit 306a), and
In a game machine equipped with
In the game time control means, when the determination result of the grant determination means is the winning game time corresponding to the grant correspondence result, the grant correspondence period corresponding to the grant correspondence state from the end timing of the winning game round ( When the period in which the first electric accessory 41a is supported in the first embodiment and the period in which the first opening / closing execution mode is performed in the second and third embodiments has elapsed, the following is performed for the winning game. It is to start the game round of
Of the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information reflecting the determination result when the special information related to the next game round is the target of the grant determination is obtained from the start of the next game round. (A function to execute a confirmation process for announcing the hold of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function to execute a process to set a hold command of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
Based on the specific result by the prior identification means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the predetermined display means (display screen G) at a predetermined timing of the grant correspondence period after the end of the winning game, and the grant is given. By displaying the stop result corresponding to the specific result of the prior identification means by the end timing of the corresponding period or the end timing of the next game round, the determination result of the grant determination for the special information related to the next game round. A game machine characterized in that it is provided with an effect executing means (a function of executing various hold notice effects in the MPU 242) for performing a game time effect for notifying.

According to the feature C10, when the winning game round is performed, the next game round is started after the granting correspondence period corresponding to the granting correspondence state elapses after the winning game round is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start of a new game round during the grant response state, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted.

In such a configuration, the variable display of the pattern is started at a predetermined timing of the grant response period based on the winning game times. The variation display is performed until the end timing of the grant response period or the end timing of the next game round. Then, by displaying the stop result, the determination result of the grant determination regarding the special information related to the next game round is notified. In this case, since the variation display of the pattern is performed using the granting response period, the variation display of the pattern can be preferably performed even when the game rotation operation period is short. Therefore, the game performance can be suitably performed, and the interest can be improved.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features C1 to C10, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B17, the following features D1 to D7, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, and the following features G1 ~ G4, the configuration limited to any one of the following features H1 to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable ball entry means (second electric combination winning opening 42 and third electric combination winning opening 43 in the first embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state.
A variable ball entry control means (second electric machine in the MPU 202) that executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is set to the open state in a predetermined game period based on a predetermined specific opportunity. Function to execute the role opening / closing process and the third electric role opening / closing process),
A privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) for granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means.
In a game machine equipped with
As the variable ball entry means, a first variable ball entry means (second electric accessory 42a) and a second variable ball entry means (third electric accessory 43a) are provided.
The variable ball entry control means
A selection means (a function of executing the second electric service opening / closing process or the third electric service opening / closing process in the MPU 202) for selecting one of the variable ball entry means for executing the variable ball entry control during the game period, and
When any of the variable ball entry means is selected by the selection means, the variable ball entry means is expected to enter the variable ball entry means during the game period. After operating in a relatively low expectation mode (open for a short time), it operates in a high expectation mode (open for a long time) in which the expectation of entering the variable ball entering means is relatively high. A gaming machine comprising a mode determining means (a function of executing a second electric service opening / closing process and a third electric service opening / closing process in the MPU 202) for determining the mode of the variable ball entry means.

According to the feature D1, variable ball entry control may be performed on the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means during the game period based on a specific opportunity. As a result, it is possible to play the game while predicting which variable ball entry means will perform the variable ball entry control during the game period, and it is possible to improve the interest through such a novel game. It is not known whether the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry means, and the player may be confused and the benefits obtained may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the variable ball entry means selected by the selection means during the game period operates in the low expectation mode and then operates in the high expectation mode. In this case, the player can easily grasp the variable entry control target based on the movement of the low expectation mode, and the player can change the variable entry of the game ball according to the movement of the high expectation mode. Can be fired at ball means. Thereby, the above-mentioned inconvenience that may occur by providing the two variable ball entry means can be avoided.

In particular, the player is expected to pay attention to each variable ball entry means during the game period. In this respect, according to this feature, since the variable ball entry control target is notified by the variable ball entry means which is the player's attention target, the notification is more preferably visually recognized by the player. Can be done.

Further, since the mode of the variable ball entry means for causing the player to grasp the variable ball entry control target is a low expectation aspect, the influence on the ball entry rate of the game ball during the game period is small. As a result, it is possible to notify the hitting by the variable ball entry means while suppressing the influence on the ball entry rate of the game ball during the game period.

Feature D2. The launching means launches a game ball at a predetermined specific cycle.
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein a specific period longer than the specific cycle is provided between the high expectation mode and the low expectation mode.

According to the feature D2, since the specific period is set longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, the game ball is fired at least once during the specific period. Thereby, based on the flow-down mode of the game ball launched during the specific period, the launch mode of the game ball can be adjusted toward the variable ball entry means for which the variable entry control is performed this time. Therefore, it is possible to preferably strike the game balls during a specific period.

Feature D3. Each of the expected degree modes is a long-term mode and a short-term mode in which the open period, which is the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state, is relatively long and short.
The game period is a predetermined upper limit period in which the opening period of the short-term mode and the opening period of the long-term mode are combined, or the number of balls entered and the length of the game ball based on the short-term mode. The specific game in which the variable ball entry control is continued until one of the events occurs, that is, the total number of game balls entered based on the period mode is the predetermined upper limit number, is specified. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, which is characterized by a gaming period.

According to the feature D3, the specific game ends when the upper limit period is the sum of the opening periods of both the short-term mode and the long-term mode. In this case, since the mode for notifying the player of the variable ball entry control target this time is the short-term mode, it is possible to secure a long opening period of the long-term mode. As a result, it is possible to notify the player by the variable ball entry means while securing the profit of the player.

Feature D4. The launching means launches a game ball at a predetermined specific cycle.
The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the opening period of the short-term mode is set shorter than the specific cycle.

According to the feature D4, since the opening period of the short-term mode is shorter than the specific cycle, even if the game ball is launched after confirming the operation of the short-term mode, the game ball is in the short-term mode. It is unlikely that the ball will enter the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the ball entry rate during the specific game due to the short-term mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the loss of profit of the player that may occur by notifying the hitting by the variable ball entry means.

Feature D5. A launch operation means (launch handle 29) to be launched by the player is provided, and the game ball is moved from the launch means toward the game area based on the launch operation performed on the launch operation means. It is a configuration to be fired,
When the launching means launches the game ball based on the first predetermined operation performed on the launching operating means, the launching means launches the game ball toward the first position in the gaming area. At the same time, when a game ball is launched based on a second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation being performed on the launch operation means, a second position different from the first position in the game area is launched. It fires a game ball toward a position,
Variable entry with high expectation of entering the ball depending on whether the launching means launches the game ball toward the first position or the launching means launches the game ball toward the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the positions of the variable ball-entry means are set in the gaming area so that the ball means are different.

According to the feature D5, in order to obtain more benefits, when aiming for the entry of the game ball into the first variable entry means and when aiming for the entry of the game ball into the second variable entry means. Therefore, it becomes necessary to change the mode of the launch operation with respect to the launch operation means. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which variable ball entry means is used for the variable ball entry control.

Feature D6. Based on the first lottery opportunity (winning to the first through gate 51), the first lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S603 of MPU202) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to perform the variable ball entry control, and
A second lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to perform the variable ball entry control based on a second lottery opportunity (winning to the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53) different from the first lottery opportunity. (Function to execute the process of step S1003 or step S1209 of MPU202) and
With
The variable ball entry control means performs the variable ball entry control for the first variable ball entry means when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the variable ball entry control. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the variable ball entry control, the variable ball entry control is performed on the second variable ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D5.

According to the feature D6, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently. As a result, the player can be made to confirm the state of the lottery by the two lottery means at the same time.

In this case, the variable ball entry control target that is controlled when the lottery result of each lottery means is the winning result is different depending on each lottery means. This makes it possible to grasp which lottery means is used for the variable ball entry control. On the other hand, since the two lottery means are performed independently, it may be difficult to grasp which variable ball entry means is the target of the variable ball entry control.

On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature D1, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that may occur by causing the two lottery means to be performed independently.

Feature D7. Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display for starting the change display of the symbol in the first display unit (first unit area 71) and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. Control means (function to execute the process of steps S505 to S517 of MPU202) and
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, the change display of the symbol is started in the second display part (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73) different from the first display part, and the second lottery means A second display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S904 to S914 or steps S1204 to S1214 of MPU202) for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of
With
Each of the display control means is
When the change display of the symbol is performed, a period determining means for determining the change display period in which the change display of the symbol is performed (a function of executing the second normal figure change start process and the third normal figure change start process of MPU202). )When,
A period measuring means for measuring the change display period (a function of updating the second timer counter T2 and the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202) and
With
In each of the display units, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the period determination means.
The variable ball entry control means said the first variable ball entry control means based on the fact that the specific stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means being the winning result is displayed on the first display unit. The means is controlled, and the second variable ball entry means is controlled based on the fact that the lottery result of the second lottery means is displayed on the second display unit as a specific stop result corresponding to the winning result. To do
Each of the change display periods is set to one of a plurality of periods having different periods.
When the specific stop result is displayed on one display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit, the measurement of the change display period corresponding to the other display unit is temporarily stopped. The gaming machine according to feature D6, characterized in that it is provided with a pausing means (a function of executing a pausing process in the MPU 202).

According to the feature D7, since the trigger of the change display of the symbol of each display unit is different and each change display period is changed, it becomes difficult to understand which variable ball entry means the variable ball entry control is performed. There is. As a result, it is difficult to know which variable ball entry means performs the variable ball entry control at a timing prior to the start timing of the variable ball entry control. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while predicting which variable ball entry means will be used for the variable ball entry control. On the other hand, it becomes difficult to grasp which variable ball entry means is subject to the variable ball entry control target, which may cause confusion for the player and reduce the benefits obtained.

On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the above feature D1, it is possible to provide a game that predicts a variable ball entry control target while reducing a decrease in the ball entry rate.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features D1 to D7, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B17, the above features C1 to C10, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, and the following features G1 ~ G4, the configuration limited to any one of the following features H1 to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of predetermined conditions (a function for executing the process of step S603 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third The function of executing the process of step S1703 of MPU 202 in the embodiment) and
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state to the advantageous state advantageous to the player, the transition means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state (first). The function of executing the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment, the function of executing the deviation variation display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
In a game machine equipped with
A measuring means for measuring a predetermined advantageous time based on the advantageous state (a function of updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a first variation of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). (Function to update the display time counter Tx) and
When it is measured by the measuring means that the advantageous time has elapsed, the advantageous state ending means (the function of executing the processes of steps S510 and S511 of the MPU 202) for ending the advantageous state, and
A measurement time notification control means (a function of displaying the remaining advantageous time in the MPU 242) that notifies the time information corresponding to the measurement result by the measurement means by the notification means (symbol display device 81), and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, the advantageous state is obtained based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition correspondence result. The advantageous state continues until the advantageous time elapses.

In such a configuration, the time information corresponding to the measurement result of the advantageous time is notified by the notification means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the elapsed mode of the advantageous time that is directly linked to the profit of the player in the advantageous state, so that the degree of attention to the game in the advantageous state can be increased, and the interest can be improved. ..

Feature E2. The notification means is a display means capable of displaying the time.
The measurement time notification control means is characterized in that the display means displays the remaining advantageous time until the advantageous time elapses in the advantageous state based on the measurement result by the measuring means. The game machine described in.

According to the feature E2, the remaining advantageous time is displayed by the display means. As a result, the remaining advantageous time can be easily grasped.

Feature E3. When the predetermined pause condition is satisfied, the pause means (function for executing the pause process of the MPU 202) for suspending the measurement of the advantageous time by the measuring means, and
A measurement restart means (a function of executing the processes of steps S524 to S526 of the MPU 202) for restarting the measurement of the advantageous time by the measurement means when a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.
With
The measurement time notification control means is characterized in that, when the measurement by the measurement means is temporarily stopped, the notification of the time information at that time is temporarily stopped until the measurement by the measurement means is resumed. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or the feature E2.

According to the feature E3, when the pause condition is satisfied, the measurement by the measuring means is suspended, and the pause is maintained until the restart condition is satisfied. In this case, the notification of the time information by the notification means is also suspended in synchronization with the suspension. As a result, in a situation where the measurement by the measuring means is temporarily stopped, the measurement result by the measuring means can be synchronized with the notification of the time information.

Feature E4. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (second electric combination winning opening 42 or third electric combination winning opening 43, second and third embodiments in the first embodiment). 2nd prize opening 302a) and
A privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 in the payout control device 117 based on a prize ball command) that grants a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means.
An opening / closing control means for controlling the variable entry means so that the variable entry means opens / closes in a predetermined operation mode based on a predetermined specific trigger (the second electric service opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). And the function of executing the third electric service opening / closing process, the function of controlling the opening / closing of the second large winning opening 302a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
With
The advantageous state is a state in which the frequency of occurrence of the specific opportunity is relatively high.
The pause condition is that the opening / closing operation is started in the variable ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the restart condition is that the opening / closing operation of the variable ball entry means is completed.

According to the feature E4, the variable ball entry means is opened and closed in the advantageous state. As a result, the game ball is likely to enter the variable ball entry means, so that the player is likely to be given a privilege, which is advantageous to the player.

In such a configuration, the measurement of the advantageous time is temporarily stopped while the opening / closing operation is performed by the variable ball entry means. As a result, since the opening / closing operation of the variable ball entry means and the update of the advantageous time do not occur at the same time, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted.

Feature E5. When it is measured by the measuring means that the advantageous time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the predetermined extension condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the extension condition is satisfied, the case is determined. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the advantageous state is provided with an extension means (a function of executing a corresponding process during out-of-order display of the MPU 202) for extending the advantageous state by a predetermined extension time.

According to the feature E5, when the extension condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is extended by a predetermined time. As a result, the advantageous state continues even though the notification means has notified that the advantageous time has passed, so that it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and whether or not the extension condition is satisfied. You can reach the passage of advantageous time while being interested in.

Feature E6. The game rotation operation is started based on the transition determination performed by the transition determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means is used to end the game rotation operation. As the first time, the predetermined notification means (first unit area 71, second and third in the first embodiment) so that the game rotation operation of each game time is performed according to the determination result of the transition determination means. It is provided with a game rotation control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202) for controlling the first result display unit 306a) in the embodiment.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the advantageous time is a time during which the winning game times corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination being the transition correspondence result are performed.

According to the feature E6, since the advantageous time is the time when the winning game times are performed, it is possible to provide a game in which the game times and the advantageous state are integrated. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature E7. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for passing through the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). Function to execute winning process for the operating port) and
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers (first electric service holding area 231, second, and third implementation in the first embodiment). Hold ball storage area 321) in the form and
With
The transition determination means determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition to the advantageous state, and a plurality of the acquired information storage means. When the special information is stored, the transition determination is sequentially performed for the plurality of special information.
The game turn control means is a time determining means (MPU 202 in the first embodiment) that determines a game turn operation time, which is the time during which the game turn is performed, based on the special information that is the determination target of the transition determination means. 1), the first special figure variation start process of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when each game round is performed, the game round is determined by the time determination means. The game rotation operation is performed in an operation mode corresponding to the operation time.
Information on the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the transition determination, and the game round when the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed. Destination identification means for specifying operation time information at a timing before the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed (a function of acquiring a variation type counter CS in the confirmation process for holding notice of MPU 202 and the variation). Equipped with a function to grasp the fluctuation display time based on the type counter CS)
In the situation where the predetermined winning game times are started, the measurement time notification control means specifies that the next game time is the winning game time with respect to the predetermined winning game time by the prior identification means. In this case, the time information corresponding to the time obtained by adding the operating time for the game round related to the winning game round on the rear side to the operating time for the game round related to the winning game round is notified. The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized in that.

According to the feature E7, when the winning game times are continuously performed, the game times operating time related to the winning game times on the rear side is added to the operating time for the game times related to the winning game times on the front side. Information corresponding to the time is notified. As a result, the player can recognize the advantageous state of 2 as the advantageous state of 1 having a long advantageous time. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the games in the advantageous state, and it is possible to more preferably improve the interest.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features E1 to E7, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B17, the above features C1 to C10, the above features D1 to D7, the following features F1 to F4, and the following features G1. ~ G4, the configuration limited to any one of the following features H1 to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of predetermined conditions (a function for executing the process of step S603 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third The function of executing the process of step S1703 of MPU 202 in the embodiment) and
A setting means (first) for setting the gaming state to the advantageous state based on the determination result of the transition determining means being a transition correspondence result corresponding to shifting the gaming state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. The function of executing the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment, the function of executing the deviation variation display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
In a game machine equipped with
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on a predetermined lottery opportunity (a function of executing the process of step S1003 or step S1209 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second And the function of executing the process of step S1803 of the MPU 202 in the third embodiment) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the payout control device 117 controls the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command). Function to do) and
With
The advantageous state is a state in which the lottery by the lottery means can be repeated a plurality of times.
A variable means for varying the duration of the advantageous state (a function of executing the process of step S608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1708 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) is provided. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the feature F1, the advantageous state is obtained based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the transition correspondence result. In the advantageous state, a lottery may be performed by the lottery means, and if the lottery result of the lottery means is the winning result, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, since the lottery of the lottery means can be repeated in the advantageous state, it is assumed that the player will make more lottery by the lottery means during the advantageous state. As a result, the degree of attention to the game in the advantageous state can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

In such a configuration, the number of times the lottery is performed by the lottery means changes due to the change in the duration of the advantageous state. As a result, the privilege given to the player in one advantageous state changes due to the change in the duration of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the duration of the advantageous state, and to more preferably improve the interest.

Feature F2. A measuring means for measuring the duration of the advantageous state (a function of updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and a function of updating the first fluctuation display time counter Tx of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). )When,
Based on the lottery by the lottery means, the symbol is changed in a predetermined display unit (second unit area 72 or third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, second result display unit 306b in the second and third embodiments). Display control in which the display is started and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means is displayed when a predetermined change display period elapses, and each unit game is performed according to the lottery of the lottery means. Means (a function of executing the processes of steps S904 to S914 or steps S1204 to S1214 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and a function of controlling the display of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
With
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a winning unit game corresponding to the winning result, the display control means grants a privilege from the end timing of the unit game to the player ( When the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, the second opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments) has elapsed, the next unit for the winning unit game It starts the game,
The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that it includes a pausing means (a function of executing a pausing process in the MPU 202) for pausing the measurement by the measuring means during the grant response period.

According to the feature F2, the measurement of the duration of the advantageous state is suspended during the grant response period. As a result, it is not necessary to set the duration of the advantageous state and the change display period in consideration of the grant response period. Therefore, the duration of the advantageous state and the change display period can be easily set.

Feature F3. The game rotation operation is started based on the transition determination performed by the transition determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means is used to end the game rotation operation. As the first time, the predetermined notification means (first unit area 71, second and third in the first embodiment) so that the game rotation operation of each game time is performed according to the determination result of the transition determination means. It is provided with a game rotation control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202) for controlling the first result display unit 306a) in the embodiment.
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the duration of the advantageous state is a period during which the winning game times corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination being the transition correspondence result are performed.

According to the feature F3, since the duration of the advantageous state is the period during which the winning game times are performed, it is possible to provide a game in which the game times and the advantageous state are integrated. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature F4. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for passing through the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). Function to execute winning process for the operating port) and
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers (first electric service holding area 231, second, and third implementation in the first embodiment). Hold ball storage area 321) in the form and
With
The transition determination means determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition to the advantageous state, and a plurality of the acquired information storage means. When the special information is stored, the transition determination is sequentially performed for the plurality of special information.
The game rotation control means is a period determination means (MPU 202 in the first embodiment) that determines a game rotation operation period, which is a period during which the game rotation is performed, based on the special information that is the determination target of the transition determination means. When each game is performed, the game is used, which is determined by the period determination means, and is provided with the first normal figure fluctuation start process and the first special figure change start process of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments. The game rotation operation is performed in an operation mode corresponding to the operation period.
Information on the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the transition determination, and the game round when the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed. Destination identification means for specifying operation period information at a timing before the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed (a function of acquiring a variation type counter CS in the confirmation process for holding notice of MPU 202 and the variation). Function to grasp the fluctuation display time based on the type counter CS) and
In a situation where the predetermined winning game times are started, when it is specified by the prior identification means that the next game time is the winning game time with respect to the predetermined winning game time, the front side said. The notification means (symbol display device 81) notifies the information corresponding to the period in which the operation period for the game rotation related to the winning game time is added to the operation period for the game rotation related to the winning game time. Means (a function of displaying the remaining advantageous time in MPU 242) and
The gaming machine according to the feature F3, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature F4, when the winning game times are continuously performed, the game time operation period related to the winning game time on the rear side is added to the game time operation period related to the winning game time on the front side. Information corresponding to the period is notified. As a result, the player can recognize the advantageous state of 2 as the advantageous state of 1 having a long duration of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the games in the advantageous state, and it is possible to more preferably improve the interest.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features F1 to F4, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B17, the above features C1 to C10, the above features D1 to D7, the above features E1 to E7, and the following features G1. ~ G4, the configuration limited to any one of the following features H1 to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A first passing portion (first through gate 51) and a second passing portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the game area and through which the game ball can pass,
A first specific control executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S202 to S205 in the MPU 202) that executes a predetermined first specific control based on the passage of the game ball through the first passing portion.
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second passing portion, the second specific control executing means (in MPU 202, steps S207 to S209) for executing the second specific control which is the same type of specific control as the first specific control. Functions to execute processing, etc.) and
With
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion.
The game ball so that the frequency of the game ball passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is smaller than the frequency of passing through the first passing portion and passing through the second passing portion. A gaming machine comprising a flow-down mode regulating means (regulation nail 64b) for regulating the flow-down mode of

According to the feature G1, a first passing portion and a second passing portion are provided, and by passing through these, each specific control is performed independently. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest of the game as compared with the configuration in which the specific control of 1 is performed.

In such a configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can flow down the gaming region and pass through the second passing portion, each specific control can occur at the same time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which each specific control is positively and simultaneously generated, and it is possible to more preferably improve the interest.

In this case, since the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is set to be smaller than the frequency of passing the game ball through the second passing portion via the first passing portion, the second specification is made. It is possible to avoid a situation where only control is performed. Thereby, it is possible to preferably provide a game in which each specific control is positively and simultaneously generated.

Feature G2. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A first passing portion (first through gate 51) and a second passing portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the game area and through which the game ball can pass,
With the first lottery means (a function of executing the processes of steps S202 to S205 in MPU202) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute the first specific control based on the passing of the game ball through the first passing portion. ,
A second lottery means (in MPU 202, steps S207 to S209) for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to execute a second specific control different from the first specific control based on the passage of the game ball through the second passing portion. Function to execute the processing of) and
With
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion.
The game ball so that the frequency of the game ball passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is smaller than the frequency of passing through the first passing portion and passing through the second passing portion. A gaming machine comprising a flow-down mode regulating means (regulation nail 64b) for regulating the flow-down mode of

According to the feature G2, a first passing portion and a second passing portion are provided, and by passing through these, a lottery by each lottery means is independently performed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest of the game as compared with the configuration in which one lottery is performed.

In such a configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can flow down the gaming area and pass through the second passing portion, lottery by each lottery means can occur at the same time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which each lottery is positively generated at the same time, and it is possible to more preferably improve the interest.

In this case, since the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is set to be smaller than the frequency of passing the game ball through the second passing portion via the first passing portion, the second lottery It is possible to avoid a situation in which only a lottery is performed by means. Thereby, it is possible to preferably provide a game in which lottery by each lottery means is positively and simultaneously generated.

Feature G3. Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display for starting the change display of the symbol in the first display unit (first unit area 71) and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. Control means (function to execute the process of steps S505 to S517 of MPU202) and
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, the change display of the symbol is started in the second display part (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73) different from the first display part, and the second lottery means A second display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S904 to S914 or steps S1204 to S1214 of MPU202) for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of
With
Each of the display control means can display the change of the symbol on the other display while the change of the symbol is displayed on one of the display units.
When the change display of the symbol is performed on the second display unit and the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit, the second display unit is displayed. It is equipped with an invalidation means (a function of executing the fluctuation reset process of the MPU 202) for invalidating the change display of the symbol and the lottery result that triggered the change display.
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, the change display period of the symbol of the first display unit is the change display of the symbol of the second display unit. The gaming machine according to feature G2, which is characterized in that it tends to be shorter than the period.

According to the feature G3, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are independently executed based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion or the second passing portion. Then, based on these lottery, when the change display of the symbol is independently performed in the first display unit and the second display unit, and the specific stop result is displayed in the first display unit or the second display unit. Is executed as the first specific control or the second specific control. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed may occur during the change display of the symbol on one of the display units, so that it is possible to provide a novel game and the degree of attention to the game. Can be further enhanced.

In addition, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed in the first display unit, the change display of the symbol performed in the second display unit and the lottery that triggered the change display are performed. The result is invalidated. This makes it possible to provide a novel game in which two specific controls are related to each other.

Further, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the change display period of the first display unit tends to be shorter than the change display period of the second display unit. Since the timing at which the game ball passes through the first passing portion is earlier than the timing at which it passes through the second passing portion, the start timing of the symbol change display in the first display portion is that in the second display portion. It tends to be earlier than the timing. As a result, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the change display of the symbol of the first display unit is likely to end before the change display of the symbol of the second display unit. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the first specific control is more likely to be executed preferentially than the second specific control while independently displaying the change of the symbol of each display unit.

Feature G4. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A first passing portion (first through gate 51) and a second passing portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the game area and through which the game ball can pass,
A first specific control executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S202 to S205 in the MPU 202) that executes a predetermined first specific control based on the passage of the game ball through the first passing portion.
With a second specific control executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S207 to S209 in the MPU 202) that executes a predetermined second specific control based on the passing of the game ball through the second passing portion. ,
With
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion.
The game ball so that the frequency of the game ball passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is smaller than the frequency of passing through the first passing portion and passing through the second passing portion. A gaming machine comprising a flow-down mode regulating means (regulation nail 64b) for regulating the flow-down mode of

According to the feature G4, a first passing portion and a second passing portion are provided, and by passing through these, each specific control is performed independently. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest of the game as compared with the configuration in which the specific control of 1 is performed.

In such a configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can flow down the gaming region and pass through the second passing portion, each specific control can occur at the same time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which each specific control is positively and simultaneously generated, and it is possible to more preferably improve the interest.

In this case, since the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is set to be smaller than the frequency of passing the game ball through the second passing portion via the first passing portion, the second specification is made. It is possible to avoid a situation where only control is performed. Thereby, it is possible to preferably provide a game in which each specific control is positively and simultaneously generated.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G4, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E7, and the features F1. ~ F4, the configuration limited to any one of the following features H1 to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
The game ball enters a predetermined ball entry portion (first electric service winning opening 41 in the first embodiment, upper operating opening 303, 401 in the second and third embodiments) provided in the game area. Based on the lottery means (first embodiment), a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific state (support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment, first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments). A function of executing the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific state, the specific state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific state (the first electric service opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). (A function to execute the function, a function to shift to the first opening / closing execution mode of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the specific state, the advantageous state transition means for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the specific state (first implementation). The MPU 202 of the first embodiment has a function of executing the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71, and the MPU 202 of the second and third embodiments has a function of executing the deviation variation display of the first result display unit 306a). A game machine to be.

According to the feature H1, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning result, it shifts to a specific state. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a non-winning result, the state shifts to an advantageous state which is more advantageous for the player than the above specific state. As a result, since the advantage is opposite to that of the normal game mode, it is possible to give unexpectedness in the game and to provide a novel game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature H2. A first variable ball-entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (first electric service winning opening 41 in the first embodiment, first large winning opening in the second and third embodiments). 301a) and
A second variable ball entry means provided in the game area and having a higher expectation that a game ball will enter than the first variable ball entry means when the same opening / closing operation as the first variable ball entry means is performed. (2nd electric service winning opening 42 or 3rd electric service winning opening 43 in the 1st embodiment, 2nd major winning opening 302a in the 2nd and 3rd embodiments)
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into each of the variable entry means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117).
A variable ball entry control having a selection means for selecting either or both of the variable ball entry means, and switching the variable ball entry means selected by the selection means to the closed state after the open state. Variable entry control means to be executed (a function of executing the second electric service opening / closing process and the third electric service opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the first embodiment, the second large winning opening 302a of the MPU 202 of the second and third embodiments Function to control opening and closing) and
With
In the specific state, the variable ball entry control is set more easily for the first variable ball entry means than for the second variable ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that, in the advantageous state, the variable ball entry control is set more easily for the second variable ball entry means than for the first variable ball entry means.

According to the feature H2, in the advantageous state, the variable ball entry control is performed for the second variable ball entry means provided separately from the first variable ball entry means. The expected degree of entry into the second variable entry means is higher than the expected degree of entry into the first variable entry means. As a result, the advantageous state is more advantageous to the player than the specific state.

In particular, by separately providing the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the advantageous state and the specific state. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp which state the player is in.

Feature H3. A regulatory means provided in the game area that regulates the entry of a game ball into the first variable entry means regardless of the opening / closing operation of the first variable entry means (first specification in the first embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature H2, which comprises a regulated nail 64c and a regulated nail 307b) in the second and third embodiments.

According to the feature H3, the entry into the first variable entry means is physically regulated by the regulation means. As a result, it is possible to make the expected degree of ball entry into each variable ball entry means different without complicating the opening / closing operation mode of each variable ball entry means. Therefore, the effect of the feature H2 can be obtained with a simple configuration as compared with the configuration in which the configuration related to the setting of the opening / closing operation mode of each variable ball entry means is provided.

Feature H4. The lottery means is a first lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate the specific state based on the first lottery opportunity.
A second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (a prize for the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, a prize for the lower operating ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments). ), The granting response state in which the granting corresponding game that grants the privilege to the player is performed (support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, the second and the third A function for executing the process of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments, in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate the second opening / closing execution mode in the embodiment. (Function to execute the process of step S1803 of MPU 202) in
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the change display of the symbol is started in the first display unit (first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). The first display control means for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, in the second and third embodiments. (Function to control the display of the first result display unit 306a of MPU202) and
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, the second display unit different from the first display unit (the second unit area 72 in the first embodiment or the third unit area 73, the second in the second and third embodiments). 2 The second display control means (steps S904 to S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for starting the change display of the symbol on the result display unit 306b) and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means. A function of executing the processes of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of controlling the display of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
With
Each of the display control means can display the change of the symbol on the other display while the change of the symbol is displayed on one of the display units.
When the change display of the symbol is performed on the second display unit and the specific stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific state is displayed on the first display unit, the line is displayed on the second display unit. It is equipped with an invalidation means (a function of executing the fluctuation reset process of the MPU 202) for invalidating the change display of the symbol and the lottery result that triggered the change display.
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the change display period of the symbol of the first display unit is easily set to be shorter than the change display period of the symbol of the second display unit. Ori
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the non-winning result, the advantageous state transition means of the first display unit for a period longer than the change display period of the symbol of the second display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that the means for facilitating change display of the symbol is provided.

According to the feature H4, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently, and based on these lottery, the change display of the symbol is displayed in the first display unit and the second display unit. Each is done independently. Then, when the specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit or the second display unit, the state shifts to the specific state or the grant corresponding state. As a result, an event of shifting to a specific state or a grant-corresponding state may occur during the display of a change in the symbol on one of the display units, so that it is possible to provide a novel game and increase the degree of attention to the game. it can.

In such a configuration, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the change display of the symbol of the first display unit is likely to end at a timing earlier than the end timing of the change display of the symbol on the second display unit. .. As a result, the gaming state is more likely to be in a specific state than the granting state.

On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the change display of the symbol of the second display unit is likely to end at a timing earlier than the end timing of the change display of the symbol on the first display unit. As a result, the gaming state is more likely to be in the granting state than in the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to create an advantageous state for the player.

By the way, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features H1 to H4, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B17, the above features C1 to C10, the above features D1 to D7, the above features E1 to E7, and the above features F1. ~ F4, the configuration limited to any one of the above features G1 to G4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 27 ... Game ball launch mechanism, 33 ... Game board, 41-43 ... Electric service winning opening, 41a-43a ... Electric accessory, 51-53 ... Through gate, 62 ... Character display, 64b ... Restricted nail, 64c ... 1st specified regulated nail, 64d ... 2nd specified regulated nail, 64e ... Strike guide nail, 71-73 ... Unit area, 81 ... Design display device, 101 ... Main control device, 102 ... Voice emission control Devices, 202 ... MPU of the main control device 101, 242 ... MPU of the voice emission control device 102, 300 ... Game board in the second embodiment, 301 ... First variable winning device, 302 ... Second variable winning device, 303 ... Above Operating port, 304 ... Lower operating port, 306 ... Main display unit, 306a ... First result display unit, 306b ... Second result display unit, 400 ... Game board in the third embodiment, 401 ... Upper operating port, 402 ... Lower Operating port, 402a ... Electric accessory, 403 ... Through gate, 404 ... Display for accessory.

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the preset grant information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. In some cases, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the plurality of special information, and
Based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined grant support state. Migration method and
The game rotation operation is started based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is set and the game rotation operation is terminated. A game time control means that controls a predetermined notification means so that the game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images